2018
CHARGER
USER
GUIDE
Whether it’s providing information about specific
product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment,
we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your
Dodge brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your
make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers
tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this
information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review
and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area
of the mopar.com (U.S.) or owners.mopar.ca (Canada)
homepage and follow the instructions to select the
applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY
OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S
MANUAL, MEDIA AND WARRANTY
BOOKLET BY VISITING:
WWW.MOPAR.COM/EN-US/CARE/OWNERS-MANUAL.HTML
(U.S. RESIDENTS);
WWW.OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
(CANADIAN RESIDENTS).
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
©2018 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC.
18LD-926-AA
CHARGER
SIXTH EDITION
USER GUIDE
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Dodge
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference for common questions. However, it
is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions,
maintenance procedures and important
safety messages, please consult your
Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the
back cover and other Warning Labels in
your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may
apply to your vehicle. For additional
information on accessories to help
personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Dodge brand dealer.
DRIVING AND
ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most
frequent causes of collisions. Your
driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a
collision. Your perceptions are less
sharp, your reflexes are slower and
your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and
then drive.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the
safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, resulting in a collision and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme
caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as
cellular telephones, computers, portable
radios, vehicle navigation or other devices,
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous and could lead to a serious
collision. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while
the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle. Some
states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road
highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in
a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
IMPORTANT
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable
year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents pre-
cision workmanship, distinctive styling, and
high quality.
ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the
road. ALW AYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
This guide illustrates and describes the opera-
tion of features and equipment that are either
standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide
may also include a description of features and
equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this guide
that are not available on this vehicle. FCA US
LLC reserves the right to make changes in de-
sign and specifications and/or make additions
to or improvements to its products without im-
posing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help you
quickly become acquainted with the important
features of your vehicle. It contains most things
you will need to operate and maintain the ve-
hicle, including emergency information.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has
factory-trained technicians and genuine
MOPAR
®
parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
HOW TO FIND YOUR OWNER’S
MANUAL ONLINE
This publication has been prepared as a refer-
ence item to help you quickly become ac-
quainted with the most important features and
processes of your vehicle. It contains most
things you will need to operate and maintain the
vehicle, including emergency information and
procedures.
This User Guide is not a replacement for the full
Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every
operation and procedure possible with your ve-
hicle.
For more detailed descriptions of the topics
discussed in this User Guide, as well as infor-
mation covering features and processes not cov-
ered in this User Guide, the full vehicle Owner’s
Manual can be accessed for free online in a
printer -friendly PDF format.
To get the full Owner ’s Manual or applicable
supplement for your vehicle, follow the appro-
priate web address below:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html
(U.S. Residents)
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our
environment and natural resources. By convert-
ing from paper to electronic delivery for the
majority of the user information for your vehicle,
together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-
based products and lessen the stress on our
environment.
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are
given, these must be intended as regarding an
occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not
complying with this rule will be properly speci-
fied in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by
way of example only: this might imply that some
details of the image do not correspond to the
actual arrangement of your vehicle.
In addition, the User Guide has been conceived
considering vehicles with the steering wheel on
the left side; it is therefore possible that in
vehicles with the steering wheel on the right
side, the position or construction of some con-
trols is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the
figure.
To identify the chapter with the information
needed you can consult the index at the end of
this User Guide.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi-
cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd
page. A few pages further there is a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the rel-
evant symbols in the tabs. There is always a
textual indication of the current chapter at the
side of each even page.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels
whose symbols indicate precautions to be ob-
served when using this component. Refer to
“W arning Lights and Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor -
mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
While reading this User Guide you will find a
series of W ARNINGS to be followed to prevent
incorrect use of components which could cause
accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be followed
to prevent against procedures that could result
in damage to your vehicle.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
2
4
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Headlight Switch 7 — Ignition
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 8 — Switch Panel
3 — Paddle Shifters 9 — Uconnect System
4 — Multifunction Lever (Behind Steering Wheel) 10 — Climate Controls
5 — Instrument Cluster 11 — Front Power Outlet
6 — Speed Controls 12 — Glove Compartment
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
INTERIOR
Interior
1 — Door Locks 5 — Parking Brake
2 — Door Handles 6 — Seats
3 — Window Switches 7 — Gear Selector
4 — Driver Memory Seat Switches
7
8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED .....11
KEYS .......................12
KeyFob.....................12
IGNITION SWITCH.................14
Keyless Push Button Ignition .........14
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........15
How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped . .15
General Information ..............16
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . .16
To Arm The System ..............16
To Disarm The System .............17
DOORS ......................18
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry.....18
SEATS.......................21
Memory Seat ..................21
Heated Seats — If Equipped .........23
Folding Rear Seat ...............25
HEAD RESTRAINTS ................26
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats . .26
Rear Head Restraints .............27
Front Head Restraint Removal ........28
STEERING WHEEL .................28
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . .28
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped ....................29
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . .29
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................30
Headlight Switch ...............30
High/Low Beam Switch ............30
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ....30
Automatic Headlights .............31
Flash-To-Pass .................31
Parking Lights .................31
Fog Lights — If Equipped ..........31
Headlights On With Wipers ..........32
Turn Signals ..................32
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped .....32
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......32
Wiper Operation ................32
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ....33
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...............34
Automatic Climate Control Overview ....34
Climate Control Functions ...........40
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ....................41
Operating Tips .................42
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .......43
Opening Sunroof ................43
Closing Sunroof.................44
V enting Sunroof — Express ..........44
Pinch Protect Feature .............44
HOOD .......................44
To Open The Hood ...............44
To Close The Hood ...............45
TRUNK ......................45
Trunk Safety...................45
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK) ....................45
Before Y ou Begin Programming HomeLink .46
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels .....46
Identifying Whether Y ou Have A Rolling Code
Or Non-Rolling Code Device..........46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
9
Programming HomeLink To A Garage Door
Opener......................47
Programming HomeLink To A Miscellaneous
Device ......................48
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink
Button ......................48
General Information ..............48
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ..............49
Electrical Power Outlets ...........49
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
10
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF
EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’ s Information right through
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NA V touchscreen sys-
tem — If Equipped.
To access the V ehicle User Guide on your
Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User
Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect
registration is required.
NOTE:
V ehicle User Guide features are not available
while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access
while the vehicle is in motion, the system will
display: Feature not available while the vehicle
is in motion.
Pre-Installed Features
• Y our User Guide —
Updated in
real-time
• Available when and
where you need it
• Touchscreen
convenience
• Customizable
interface
• Maintenance
schedules and
information
•
Multilingual
• Comprehensive
icon & symbol
glossary
Once you launch your V ehicle User Guide, you
will be able to explore your warranty information
and radio manual when and where you need
them. Y our Uconnect system displays the Ve-
hicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to
assist in better understanding your vehicle.
There’s no app to download, no phone to con-
nect and no external device needed for play-
back. Plus, it’ s updated throughout the year , in
real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen
radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NA V application — If Equipped
• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites
category
• Icon and symbol glossary
• Warranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
•
Operating
Instructions
• Maintenance
Schedules
• W arranty
Information
• Emergency
Procedures
• Fluid Level
Standards
• 911 Contact and
More
Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to
add it to your Favorites, for easy access in the
future.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Vehicle User Guide Touchscreen Icon
11
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
ignition system consists of a key fob with Re-
mote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a ST ART/STOP
push button ignition system. The Remote Key-
less Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’ s
wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and trunk from distances up to approxi-
mately 66 feet (20 m) using a handheld key fob.
The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
SR T vehicles, equipped with the 6.2L Super-
charged engine, come with three key fobs (two
red and one black) that allow for different en-
gine power levels. Please refer to the “Drive
Mode Supplement” for further descriptions.
NOTE:
In the ON/RUN position, key fob commands are
disabled if the vehicle is at or above 5 MPH.
The key fob also contains an emergency key,
which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
key fob go dead. The emergency key is also for
locking/unlocking the glove compartment. Y ou
can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the me-
chanical release button on the back of the key
fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the
key out with your other hand.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or dead battery . In this situation, a backup
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side
opposite of the Emergency Key) against the
ENGINE START/STOP button and push to op-
erate the ignition switch.
Key Fob
1 — Trunk Open 4 — Remote Start
2 — Unlock 5 — Panic Button
3 — Lock 6 — Emergency
Key
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
12
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system
will also be activated.
NOTE:
All door unlock settings can be programmed to
your convenience through Uconnect Settings.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in the Owner’ s Manual for further information.
• Unlock the driver door on the first push of the
key fob unlock button.
• Unlock all doors on the first push of the key
fob unlock button.
NOTE:
To unlock doors and trunk with passive entry,
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry”
located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know Y our
V ehicle” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor-
mation.
NOTE:
When you use the key fob to open any door, the
courtesy lights, overhead lights, and approach
lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped) will
turn on. Refer to “Interior Lights” in “Getting To
Know Y our Vehicle” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information
To Lock The Doors And Trunk
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal if programmed.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in the Owner’s Manual for further programmable
information.
NOTE:
To lock the doors with passive entry , Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located
in “Doors” in “Getting To Know Y our Vehicle” in
the Owner’ s Manual for further information.
If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
automatically if the key is left inside the passen-
ger compartment, otherwise the doors will stay
locked.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the ve-
hicle electronics can be used to start and oper-
ate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed
to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any
other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the ve-
hicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer . This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to
an authorized dealer .
13
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition with the push of a button as long as the
key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four op-
erating positions, three of which are labeled and
will illuminate when in position. The three po-
sitions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth
position is START. During start, ON/RUN will
illuminate.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
dead battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the EN-
GINE ST AR T/STOP button and push to operate
the ignition switch.
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available.
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
START/STOP Ignition Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
14
ON/RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• The engine will start.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of rea-
sons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
WARNING!
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather . Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine," in "Starting And
Operating" in the Owner’ s Manual for further
information.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped
Push remote start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. Push-
ing the remote start button a third
time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
and push the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
• With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be started with the key after
two consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
15
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Check engine light shall not be present
• P ANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote
start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• Vehicle Security Alarm is not signaling an
intrusion
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas con-
tains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odor -
less and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the keyless
push button ignition for unauthorized opera-
tion. While the vehicle security alarm is armed,
interior switches for door locks and trunk re-
lease are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide
the following audible and visible signals: the
horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the vehicle security light
in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’ s ignition is placed in
the OFF mode. Refer to "Ignition Switch" in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in the Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
16
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Pas-
sive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob
available in the same exterior zone (refer
to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry ,"
located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle" for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock
plunger.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle,
if equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry ,” located in “Doors” in “Getting
To Know Y our Vehicle” for further information.
• Push the Keyless Enter -N-Go ignition button
(requires at least one valid key fob in the
vehicle).
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not un-
lock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However , you can create condi-
tions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door , the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle se-
curity alarm will remain armed when the battery
is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the ve-
hicle security alarm.
17
DOORS
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and
a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’ s
door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed on or off.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’ s Manual for further infor-
mation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and arm the security alarm
(if equipped).
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle passive entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the key
fob’s wireless signal and prevent the passive
entry handle from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically . The interior door panel lock
knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
front driver’ s door handle. For further informa-
tion regarding selecting “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
front passenger door handle to unlock all four
doors automatically . The interior door panel lock
knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed, regardless of the driv-
er’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
18
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with pas-
sive entry . There are three situations that trigger
a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry ve-
hicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur , after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the car and it does not find any Passive
Entry key fobs outside the car , then the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key fob is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will
not unlock the doors when any of the following
conditions are true:
• The doors are locked manually using the door
lock knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either
Passive Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close the
doors.
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the
right side of CHMSL (Center High Mounted
Stop Light), which is located on the deck lid.
NOTE:
If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive
Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch,
unless another one of the vehicle’ s Passive En-
try key fobs is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the deck lid.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
19
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handles, push the door handle lock
button to lock all four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to check
if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door
handle, without the vehicle reacting and un-
locking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the key fob lock button or the lock button
located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When
Locking
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
20
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Memory Seat
This feature allows the driver to store up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through
a memory switch. Each memory profile contains
desired position settings for the driver seat, side
mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic steering
column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Y our remote keyless entry key
fob can also be programmed to recall the same
positions when the unlock button is pushed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
one key fob can be linked to memory position
1 and the other key fob can be linked to memory
position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driv-
er’s door trim panel. The switch consists of three
buttons: The set (S) button, which is used to
activate the memory save function, and the
memory (1) and (2) buttons, which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory
profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’ s ignition to the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2.
Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column [if equipped],
and radio station presets).
Memory Seat Switches
21
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either
of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instru-
ment cluster display will display which
memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the ve-
hicle in P ARK, but the vehicle must be in
PARK to recall a memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must
select the “Personal Settings Linked To Fob”
feature through the Uconnect system screen.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in the Owner’ s Manual for further information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’ s ignition to the OFF
position.
2.
Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The
system will recall any stored settings for this
profile. Wait for the system to complete the
memory recall before continuing to step three.
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to "Programming The Memory Feature"
in this section for instructions on how to set
a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory
switch, then push and release memory but-
ton (1) or memory button (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in
the instrument cluster display .
4. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your
memory settings by pushing the set (S) button,
and within 10 seconds push the unlock button
on the key fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the
vehicle is not in PARK, a message will display in
the instrument cluster display .
To recall the memory settings for driver 1, push
memory button (1) on the driver's door or the
unlock button on the key fob linked to memory
position 1.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
the memory settings will be recalled with a
Passive Entry Unlock into the driver's door using
the key fob linked to position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver 2, push
memory button (2) on the driver's door or the
unlock button on the key fob linked to memory
position 2.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
the memory settings will be recalled with a
Passive Entry Unlock into the driver's door using
the key fob linked to position 2.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
22
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver's door
during a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the
driver's seat or power tilt and telescopic steering
column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat po-
sitioning to enhance driver mobility when enter-
ing and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you cycle the vehicle’ s ignition to the OFF posi-
tion.
• When you cycle the vehicle’ s ignition to the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches
(67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicle’ s ignition to the ACC or
RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the
driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy
Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an asso-
ciated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The
Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later dis-
abled) through the programmable features in
the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’ s Manual
for further details.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may
be equipped with heaters located in the seat
cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury , medi-
cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater . It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause se-
rious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
23
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seat control buttons are lo-
cated within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat set-
tings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen but-
tons indicate the level of heat in use. Two
indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, and one
for LO. Turning the heating elements off will
return the user to the radio screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn
the HI setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LO-level after ap-
proximately 60 minutes of continuous opera-
tion. At that time, the display will change from
HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level
setting will turn off automatically after approxi-
mately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated seats can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’ s Manual
for further details.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-
cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
WARNING!
• Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause se-
rious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are
equipped with heated seats. The heated seat
switches for these seats are located on the rear
of the center console. There are two heated seat
switches
that allow the rear passengers to
operate the seats independently .
You can choose from HI, LO, or off heat settings.
The indicator lights in each switch indicate the
level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO, and none for off.
• Push the heated seat button
once to
select HI-level heating.
• Push the heated seat button
a second
time to select LO-level heating.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
24
• Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approxi-
mately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs
changes from two to one, indicating the change.
The LO-level setting will turn off automatically
after approximately 45 minutes.
Front Ventilated Seats
If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated seats,
the seat cushion and seat back will have fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and
move air through fine perforations in the seat cover
to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate
at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. Y ou can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to
choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second
time to choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the ventilated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” in the Owner's Manual for fur -
ther information.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to
provide an additional storage area. To fold the
rear seatback, pull on the loops located on the
upper seatback.
NOTE:
These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded
forward.
Rear Seat Loop
25
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
When the seatback is folded to the upright posi-
tion, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on
the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with
the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded
down position) should not be used as a play
area by children when the vehicle is in mo-
tion. They could be seriously injured in a
collision. Children should be seated and us-
ing the proper restraint system.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear-impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver , should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are
equipped with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR).
In the event of a rear impact, the RHRs will
automatically extend forward minimizing the
gap between the back of the occupant’s head
and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their
normal position following a rear impact. If the
RHRs do not return to their normal position, see
your authorized dealer immediately .
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button located at the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head
restraint.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
26
WARNING!
•
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious injury
or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always
securely stow removed head restraints in a
location outside the occupant compartment.
WARNING!
• ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
•
Do not place items over the top of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat cov-
ers or portable DVD players. These items may
interfere with the operation of the Reactive
Head Restraint in the event of a collision and
could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable
positions: up or down. When the center seat is
being occupied, the head restraint should be in
the raised position. When there are no occu-
pants in the center seat, the head restraint can
be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver .
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located at the base of the head
restraint and push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
• The head restraint should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If the center rear head restraints requires
removal, see your authorized dealer.
• The outboard head restraints are not
adjustable.
Adjustment Button
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Adjustment Button
27
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the occu-
pants. Follow the re-installation instructions
above prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as
it can go. Then, push the adjustment button
and the release button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall
the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate
height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 de-
grees to the incorrect position in an attempt to
gain additional clearance to the back of the
head.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head re-
straints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
STEERING WHEEL
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering col-
umn upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steer-
ing wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position,
push the lever upward until fully engaged.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
28
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose con-
trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warn-
ing may result in serious injury or death.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
— If Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering col-
umn upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
power tilt/telescoping steering column switch is
located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up
or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the switch toward you or
push the switch away from you as desired.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your remote keyless entry key fob or
the memory switch on the driver's door trim
panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering col-
umn to pre-programmed positions. Refer to
“Driver Memory Seat” in this section.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose con-
trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warn-
ing may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel has only one temperature
setting. Once the heated steering wheel has
been turned on, it will stay on for an average of
80 minutes or more before automatically shut-
ting off. This time will vary based on environ-
mental temperatures. The heated steering
wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when
the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. Y ou can
gain access to the control button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” in the Owner’ s Manual for fur -
ther information.
29
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-
cation, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low tempera-
tures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such as
a blanket or steering wheel covers of any
type and material. This may cause the
steering wheel heater to overheat.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dim-
ming, interior lights and fog lights (if equipped).
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the sec-
ond detent for headlight, parking light and instru-
ment panel light operation. Push the switch to
enable fog lights (if equipped).
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to
switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the
multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror . This camera detects ve-
hicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the ap-
proaching vehicle is out of view .
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON”
under “Auto High Beam” within your
Uconnect settings, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner’ s Manual for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
Headlight Switch
1 — Automatic Headlights
2 — Rotate Headlight Switch
3 — Rotate Instrument Panel Dimmer
4 — Rotate Ambient Light Dimmer
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
30
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror
must be re-aimed to ensure proper perfor -
mance. See your local authorized dealer .
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO head-
light position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you
(toward front of vehicle) to engage the high
beam mode.
NOTE:
This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or
rearward in vehicle) to manually deactivate
the system (normal operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to
reactivate the system.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When
the system is on, the headlight time delay fea-
ture is also on. This means the headlights will
stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. The headlight
time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/
90 seconds.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in your Owner’s Manual for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your head-
lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever
toward you. This will turn on the high beam
headlights until the lever is released.
NOTE:
If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 20 seconds, the
high beams will shut off.
Parking Lights
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first de-
tent to turn the parking lights on. This also turns
on all instrument panel lighting.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the head-
light switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the headlight switch. To turn off the front
fog lights, either push the headlight switch a
second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster dis-
play illuminates when the fog lights are turned
on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However , select-
ing the high beam headlights will turn off the
fog lights.
31
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will
turn on after the wipers are turned on if the
headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position
and programmable feature is set to on. In addi-
tion, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature.
NOTE:
The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can
be turned on or off using the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in your Owner’ s Manual for further information.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument clus-
ter display flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction
lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent, past the intermittent settings for
low-speed wiper operation, or to the second
detent past the intermittent settings for high-
speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driv-
ing through an automatic car wash. Dam-
age to the windshield wipers may result if
the wiper control is left in any position
other than off.
• In cold weather , always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine.
If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the wind-
shield wiper control is turned off and the
blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur .
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
32
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the wind-
shield and automatically activates the wipers for
the driver . The feature is especially useful for
road splash or overspray from the windshield
washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever . Wiper delay posi-
tion 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay
position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting
3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be
used if the driver desires more sensitivity . Place
the wiper switch in the off position when not
using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or high-
speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is pres-
ent on the windshield.
•
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protection fea-
tures for the wiper blades and arms, and will not
operate under the following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing sys-
tem will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph
(0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater
than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing sys-
tem will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of
the NEUTRAL position.
NOTE:
Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” in your Owner’ s Manual for
further information.
33
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
34
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
35
Automatic Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
36
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recircula-
tion mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high hu-
midity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. The A/C can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur . Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will
cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section
for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may in-
crease. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the Front Mode Defrost button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.
37
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after ten minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen
or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push
the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow on the touch-
screen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature
is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the
passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
38
Icon Description
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds avail-
able. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
•
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air .
The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
39
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions
that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the wind-
shield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air condition-
ing system is turned on, cool dehumidified air
will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For
improved fuel economy , Push A/C button to turn
off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor
modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode and adjust
blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radia-
tor), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser .
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
40
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings. Press-
ing other settings will cause the MAX A/C opera-
tion to switch to the selected setting and MAX
A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high
humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may
wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the
recirculation control button. The recirculation
indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Press the button a second time to turn
off the recirculation mode and allow outside air
into the vehicle.
NOTE:
In cold weather , use of recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recircu-
lation feature may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the wind-
shield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and auto-
matically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the set-
tings. Y ou will experience the greatest effi-
ciency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as
quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer -programmable feature. Refer to the
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed and
transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
41
Operating Tips
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant (con-
forming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling sys-
tem is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
V ehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy , and/or humid weather . To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and in-
crease the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long peri-
ods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window . Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water .
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments,
or abrasive window cleaners on the inte-
rior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air in-
take may reduce airflow , and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air . Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have
it replaced when needed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
42
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked ve-
hicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, par-
ticularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while op-
erating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sun-
roof. Y ou could also be seriously injured or
killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly
and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project
through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Opening Sunroof
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will
open automatically and stop when the full open
position is reached. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any
other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward. The sunroof will move rearward and
automatically stop at full open position. Any
release of the switch will stop the movement.
The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof
switch is pushed again.
Power Sunroof Switch
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
43
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close au-
tomatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically . This is called
“Express Close.” During Express Close opera-
tion, any other actuation of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
forward. The sunroof will move forward and auto-
matically stop at full closed position. Any release of
the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof
will remain in a partially closed condition until the
sunroof switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the V ent button within one
half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express V ent”, and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position. Dur-
ing Express Vent operation, any other actuation
of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automati-
cally retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re-
sult in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
HOOD
To Open The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
left side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the front of the vehicle.
3. Reach under the center front edge of the
hood and push and hold the safety catch
lever to the left.
4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.
Hood Release
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
44
To Close The Hood
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to fol-
low this warning could result in serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
TRUNK
Trunk Safety
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency
release lever is built into the trunk latching mecha-
nism. In the event of an individual being locked
inside the trunk, the trunk can be opened by
actuating the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to
the trunk latching mechanism.
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the
trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from
outside, or through the inside of the vehicle.
Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle
is unattended. Once in the trunk, young chil-
dren may not be able to escape, even if they
entered through the rear seat. If trapped in
the trunk, children can die from suffocation
or heat stroke.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK)
• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as ga-
rage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or
home security systems. The HomeLink unit is
powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
• The HomeLink buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink channels.
HomeLink Buttons And Indicator Light
45
• To operate HomeLink, push and release any of
the programmed HomeLink buttons. These
buttons will activate the devices they are pro-
grammed to with each press of the corre-
sponding HomeLink button.
• The HomeLink indicator light is located above
the center button.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
For efficient programming and accurate trans-
mission of the radio-frequency signal, it is rec-
ommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
programmed to the HomeLink system. Make
sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed
to activate the device you are trying to program
your HomeLink button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the chan-
nels of your HomeLink before you use it for the
first time.
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or , on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming ad-
ditional buttons.
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or non-
rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typi-
cally, devices manufactured after 1995 have
rolling codes. A device with a rolling code will
also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button lo-
cated where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately
visible when looking at the device. The name
and color of the button may vary slightly by
manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the
button you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
46
Programming HomeLink To A Garage Door
Opener
To program any of the HomeLink buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor , follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program, while
keeping the HomeLink indicator light in
view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you
want to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you
are trying to replicate.
4.
Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink indicator light. The HomeLink indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor . Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the pro-
grammed HomeLink button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor oper-
ates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the final steps for
the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink
button and observe the HomeLink indicator
light. If the HomeLink indicator light stays
on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
beginning.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the uni-
versal transceiver . Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
•
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle con-
tains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless
and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others
to be severely injured or killed.
47
Programming HomeLink To A
Miscellaneous Device
Refer to “Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener” for the procedure on how to pro-
gram HomeLink to a miscellaneous device, as it
follows the same procedure. Be sure to deter-
mine if the device has a rolling code, or non-
rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner . The procedure
may need to be preformed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink
buttons.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
To reprogram a single HomeLink button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure
to determine whether the new device you want
to program the HomeLink button to has a Roll-
ing Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink Indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all remain-
ing steps.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
48
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Electrical Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt
(13 Amp) power outlet on the instrument panel
and one 12 V olt (13 Amp) power outlet in the
center console that can be used to power cellu-
lar phones, small electronics and other low pow-
ered electrical accessories. The power outlets
are labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”
symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position, while the outlets labeled with a “bat-
tery” are connected directly to the battery and
powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
The front power outlet is located inside the
storage area on the center stack of the instru-
ment panel.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin
located on the center console on vehicles not
equipped with the ash receiver tray. A fire
leading to bodily injury could result.
In addition to the front power outlet, there is
also a power outlet located in the storage area of
the center console.
NOTE:
If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the
center console power outlet. When the Media
Hub is not in use, the outlet can deliver up to
160 Watts (13 Amps). If the power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system needs
to be replaced.
Front Power Outlet
Center Console Power Outlet
49
NOTE:
The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
console USB ports can be changed to “battery”
powered all the time by moving the
#12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN” to “B+”. Refer to
“Fuses” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
WARNING!
• Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause
an electric shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — #12 Fuse 20A Y ellow Cigar Lighter Integrated Center Stack / Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20A Y ellow Power Outlet Center Console / Media Hub
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
50
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge
sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery .
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only . Do not hang any type of acces-
sory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage.
51
52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .........54
Location And Controls .............54
Engine Oil Life Reset .............55
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ........56
Red Warning Lights ..............56
Yellow Warning Lights .............59
Yellow Indicator Lights .............62
Green Indicator Lights .............63
White Indicator Lights .............63
Blue Indicator Lights..............64
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .65
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ..................65
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
53
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instru-
ment cluster display, which offers useful infor-
mation to the driver. With the ignition in the
STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Y our
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’ s sys-
tems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. Y ou can access the spe-
cific information you want and make selections
and adjustments.
Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features an in-
teractive display which is located in the instru-
ment cluster .
This system conveniently allows the driver to
select a variety of useful information by pushing
the arrow buttons located on the left side of the
steering wheel. The instrument cluster display
menu items consist of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Performance
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning
• Diagnostics
The system allows the driver to select informa-
tion by pushing the following buttons mounted
on the steering wheel:
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrows allows you to cycle
through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
54
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows you to
cycle through the submenu items of the Main
menu item.
NOTE:
•
Holding the
up/down or left/right
arrow button
will loop the user through the currently selected
menu or options presented on the screen.
• Main menu and submenus wrap for continu-
ous scrolling.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last
submenu screen viewed within that main
menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
• Pushing the OK button changes units (mph
or km/h).
For Screen Setup:
• OK button allows user to enter menu and
submenus.
• Within each submenu layer, the up and down
arrows will allow the user to select the item of
interest.
• Pushing the OK button makes the selection
and a confirmation screen will appear (return-
ing the user to the first page of the submenu).
• Pushing the left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new
Performance Timers):
• Information is reset by pushing and holding
the OK button.
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change Re-
quired” message will display in the instrument
cluster display for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next sched-
uled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluc-
tuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to dis-
play each time you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message tem-
porarily, push and release the OK or arrow but-
tons. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster dis-
play controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“V ehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life.
If conditions are met, the gauge and numeric
display will update to show 100%. If condi-
tions are not met a popup message of "To
reset oil life engine must be off with ignition
in run" will be displayed (for five seconds),
and the user will remain at the Oil Life
screen.
55
5. Push and release the up or down arrow but-
ton to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator sys-
tem did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button once to return
the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator sys-
tem did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when appli-
cable. These indications are indicative and pre-
cautionary and as such must not be considered
as exhaustive and/or alternative to the informa-
tion contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active tell-
tales will display first if applicable. The system
check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some telltales are optional and may not appear .
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake func-
tions, including brake fluid level and parking
brake application. If the brake light turns on it
may indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir , it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been cor-
rected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
56
The dual brake system provides a reserve brak-
ing capacity in the event of a failure to a portion
of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of
the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake
W arning Light, which will turn on when the
brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service per-
formed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. Y ou could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
V ehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake W arning Light will
turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake W arning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two sec-
onds. The light should then turn off unless the
parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer .
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the bat-
tery is not charging properly. If it stays on while
the engine is running, there may be a malfunc-
tion with the charging system. Contact an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the elec-
trical system or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting
And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual for fur-
ther information.
57
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and oth-
ers. Service should be obtained as soon as
possible.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the
vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer .
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warn-
ing Light
This warning light warns of an overheated en-
gine condition. If the engine coolant tempera-
ture is too high, this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound. If the tempera-
ture reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the
engine is able to cool: whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tempera-
ture reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Y our Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
soon as possible, and contact an authorized
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
58
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position
and if the driver’ s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continu-
ously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
— Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer tow-
ing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster , with the
transmission in P ARK or NEUTRAL, until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally .
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature W arning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to
boil over , come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature W arning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission dam-
age or transmission failure.
— Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is
open and not fully closed.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until
the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indica-
tor Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and auto-
matic transmission control systems. This warn-
ing light will illuminate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the
bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
59
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter , as ref-
erenced above, can reach higher tempera-
tures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or
park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could re-
sult in death or serious injury to the driver ,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to
the vehicle control system. It also could af-
fect fuel economy and driveability . If the MIL
is flashing, severe catalytic converter dam-
age and power loss will soon occur . Immedi-
ate service is required.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Active Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Elec-
tronic Stability Control system is Active. The
“ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster
will come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when
ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the
Traction Mode is set to Sport, Track or Full OFF
in Drive Modes.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that
slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
60
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steer -
ing. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immedi-
ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your ve-
hicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under -inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under -inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under -inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly . The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the instal-
lation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to con-
tinue to function properly .
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the origi-
nal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres-
sures and warning have been established for
the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Unde-
sirable system operation or sensor damage
may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have your sensor func-
tion checked.
61
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal
(7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime will
sound. The light will remain on until fuel is
added.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required
as soon as possible. However , the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also
on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
— Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning System.
Contact your local authorized dealer for service.
Refer to "Forward Collision W arning (FCW)" in
"Safety" for further information.
— Service AWD Warning Light — If
Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact
your authorized dealer .
— LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with
visual and steering torque warnings when the
vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintention-
ally without the use of a turn signal.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow .
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white/green to flashing
yellow.
• Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped" in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information.
— Service LaneSense Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and requires
service. Please see an authorized dealer .
— Service Adaptive Cruise Control
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not oper-
ating and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Forward Collision Warning Off Indi-
cator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
Forward Collision Warning is off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
62
Green Indicator Lights
— ECO Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when ECO Mode is active.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
With Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a
target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
Without Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display the distance setting for the ACC
system when the system is engaged. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
speed control is set to the desired speed. Refer
to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid
green when both lane markings have been de-
tected and the system is “armed” and ready to
provide visual and torque warnings if an unin-
tentional lane departure occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
— Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn sig-
nal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be acti-
vated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
— Custom Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Custom Mode is
active.
Refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for fur -
ther information.
63
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) has been turned on, but is not set.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when the
speed control is ready , but not set.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
armed, the LaneSense indicator light illumi-
nates solid white. This occurs when only left,
right, or neither lane line has been detected. If a
single lane line is detected, the system is ready
to provide only visual warnings if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs on the detected
lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information.
— Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active.
Refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for fur-
ther information.
— Track Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Track Mode is
active.
Refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for fur-
ther information.
— Valet Mode SRT Indicator
Light
This light will turn on when Valet Mode is active.
Refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for fur-
ther information.
— Passive Speed Limiter Engaged
The indicator light will illuminate white along
with a notification text message (Speed Warn-
ing Set to XX followed by unit). When the set
speed is just exceeded, a single chime will
sound along with pop up message of Speed
W arning Exceeded. When the set speed is ex-
ceeded by 2 mph (3 km/h) or more, the indica-
tor will light up yellow and flash along with a
continuous chime (up to 10 seconds or until the
speed is no longer exceeded).
NOTE:
The number “31” is only an example of a speed
that can be selected.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
64
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —
OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the emis-
sions, engine, and transmission control sys-
tems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as en-
gine emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission con-
trol system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur . Immediate
service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls. Autho-
rized service technicians may need to access
this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver -behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, in-
cluding safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an ac-
cident involving serious injury or
death.
• Access, or allow others to access, in-
formation stored in your vehicle sys-
tems, including personal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
65
66
SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........68
Blind Spot Monitoring .............68
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .......69
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .70
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ........75
Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . .75
Important Safety Precautions ........75
Seat Belt Systems ...............76
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . .83
Child Restraints ................92
Transporting Pets ...............103
SAFETY TIPS ..................103
Transporting Passengers ...........103
Exhaust Gas .................104
Safety Checks Y ou Should Make Inside The
V ehicle ....................104
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle .............106
SAFETY
67
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar-based sensors, located inside the rear
bumper fascia, to detect Highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles etc.)
that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/
front/side of the vehicle.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rear view mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detec-
tion zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM warning light, located in the outside
mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle moves into a
blind spot zone.
The BSM system can also be configured to
sound an audible (chime) alert and mute the
radio to notify you of objects that have entered
the detection zones.
Rear Detection Zones
Blind Spot Mirror
SAFETY
68
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’ s authority to operate the
equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
provides the driver with audible warnings and
visual warnings within the instrument cluster
display, to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings are in-
tended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Stabil-
ity Control (ESC) system, to calculate the prob-
ability of a forward collision. When the system
determines that a forward collision is probable,
the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The forward collision button is located in the
Uconnect display in the controls settings. When
FCW is selected "off", there will be an "FCW
OFF" icon that appears in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
• The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the
system from warning you of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front of you. If FCW is
set to off, “FCW OFF” will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature has two settings and can be
changed within the Uconnect System Screen:
• Far
• Near
Far
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting.
The far setting provides warnings for potential
collisions more distant in front of the vehicle,
allowing the driver to have the most reaction
time to avoid a collision.
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent
warnings may prefer this setting.
69
NOTE:
This setting gives you the most reaction time.
Near
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
allows the system to warn you of a potential
frontal collision when you are much closer .
This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” setting, which allows for a more dynamic
driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to
avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
Refer to your Owner’s Manual for further details.
WARNING!
Forward Collision W arning (FCW) is not in-
tended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
FCW detect every type of potential collision.
The driver has the responsibility to avoid a
collision by controlling the vehicle via brak-
ing and steering. Failure to follow this warn-
ing could lead to serious injury or death.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on
the vehicle recommended cold placard pres-
sure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature de-
creases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for information on how to prop-
erly inflate the vehicle’ s tires. The tire pressure
will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
SAFETY
70
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason, in-
cluding low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or
above the recommended cold placard pressure.
Once the low tire pressure warning (TPMS
W arning Light) illuminates, you must increase
the tire pressure to the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three hours)
placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi
(158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn on the TPMS W arning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but
the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’ s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. The
TPM sensor is not designed for use on
CAUTION!
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sen-
sor damage. Customers are encouraged to
use OEM wheels to assure proper TPM
feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af-
ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could dam-
age the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance or to provide warn-
ing of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
71
• Driving on a significantly under -inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under -inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS W arning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the ac-
tual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of
the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings
to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system mes-
sages, which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System W arning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) W arning Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display an “Inflate to
XX” message and a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire pres-
sure values shown in a different color .
Should this occur , you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those shown in a different color in
the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’ s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message.
Once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update, the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will
change color back to the original color , and the
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
SAFETY
72
TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
Service Tire Pressure System Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "Service Tire Pressure System" mes-
sage for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still ex-
ists. If the system fault no longer exists, the
TPMS W arning Light will no longer flash, and
the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will
no longer display , and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
• Signal interference due to electronic devices
or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full
size does not have a tire pressure monitoring
sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching
full size spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle,
the TPMS W arning Light will remain on and
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic
in the instrument cluster will still display a
different color pressure value and an "Inflate
to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warn-
ing Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. In addition, the
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
73
instrument cluster will display a “Service
Tire Pressure System” message for five sec-
onds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS W arning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a “Service Tire Pressure System”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare or non-matching full size,
the TPMS will update automatically. In ad-
dition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
and the graphic in the instrument cluster
will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS W arning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the “Ser -
vice Tire Pressure System” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the
TPMS will no longer chime or display the “Ser -
vice Tire Pressure System” message in the in-
strument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in
place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
TPM sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The
instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire
Pressure System” message and then display pres-
sure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "Service Tire Pressure System"
message will no longer be displayed as long as no
system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
SAFETY
74
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’ s authority to operate the
equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on oth-
ers. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer .
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly , to keep you and your passen-
gers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear -facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further infor-
mation) should be secured in the rear seat of
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride prop-
erly buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly .
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window . If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants
and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9.
If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for
customer service contact information.
75
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger , in-
cluding a child in a rear -facing child re-
straint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt
Alert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the ST ART or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the ST ART or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and re-
main on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning se-
quence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning se-
quence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
SAFETY
76
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on the
outboard front passenger seat or when the seat
is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer . FCA US LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal condi-
tions. However, in a collision the seat belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, the air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. Y ou can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver , should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
• W earing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
77
WARNING!
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly . Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than
one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut
into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat
against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately
and have it fixed.
WARNING!
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The
lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the in-
side surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat
belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoul-
der so that your strongest bones will take
the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant
to be used together.
WARNING!
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protec-
tion. Inspect the seat belt system periodi-
cally, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a colli-
sion.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door . Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the web-
bing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt
to go around your lap.
SAFETY
78
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen.
To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap
belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and
pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoul-
der and chest with minimal, if any slack so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in
the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If neces-
sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing
to allow the seat belt to retract fully .
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible
to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Buckle
2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
79
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from
your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage but-
ton to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
higher position. After you release the anchorage
button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be ad-
justed in the upward position without pushing
or squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull down-
ward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
WARNING!
• W earing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
WARNING!
• Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could re-
duce the effectiveness of the safety belt in
a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an autho-
rized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt
Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
Adjustable Anchorage
SAFETY
80
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is
physically required in order to properly fit
the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE
the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center
of the occupant’ s body is LESS than
6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants in-
cluding pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the shoul-
der belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with preten-
sioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These
devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a
collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags,
the pretensioners are single use items. A de-
ployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must
be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help fur -
ther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner .
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
81
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure
a child restraint system. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using
The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Re-
straints” section of this manual. The figure
below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-
section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as
the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then care-
fully pull out only the amount of webbing nec-
essary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with
a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger , in-
cluding a child in a rear -facing child re-
straint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Auto-
matic Locking Mode.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
SAFETY
82
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt
function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in
the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restrain-
ing the child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on oth-
ers. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer .
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and inter-
connecting wiring associated with the electrical
Air Bag System Components. Y our vehicle may
be equipped with the following Air Bag System
Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system whenever
the ignition switch is in the STAR T or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply sys-
tem that may deploy the air bag system even if
the battery loses power or it becomes discon-
nected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
83
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warn-
ing Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
• The Air Bag W arning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag W arning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer , tachometer , or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be dis-
abled. In this condition the air bags may not be
ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a colli-
sion. If the light does not come on as a bulb
check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
W arning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition,
a single chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger .
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compart-
ment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
are embossed on the air bag covers.
SAFETY
84
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag de-
ployment could cause serious injury, in-
WARNING!
cluding death. Air bags need room to in-
flate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger , in-
cluding a child in a rear-facing child re-
straint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi-
stage driver and front passenger air bags. This
system provides output appropriate to the sever-
ity and type of collision as determined by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system compo-
nents.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deploy-
ment. A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for
more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch
that detects whether the driver or front passen-
ger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle
switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
85
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. Y ou may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are de-
signed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear , side, or rollover colli-
sions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may pro-
duce substantial vehicle damage — for ex-
ample, some pole collisions, truck underrides,
and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle decel-
eration over time, vehicle speed and damage by
themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger , and
position the front occupants for improved inter-
action with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, ste-
reos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The Supple-
mental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced
protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
SAFETY
86
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occu-
pant injury during certain side impacts, in addi-
tion to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’ s trim cover .
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door . The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bag Label
87
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition
to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the
side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window . The SABICs inflate with
enough force to injure occupants if they are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are posi-
tioned in the area where the SABICs inflate.
Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim cov-
ering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any ob-
structions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as in-
tended, do not install any accessory items
in your vehicle which could alter the roof.
Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not
drill into the roof of the vehicle for any
reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the de-
ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sen-
sors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is cali-
brated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact
side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side im-
pacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently;
a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags
only and a right-side impact deploys the right
Side Air Bags only . Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not im-
pact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SAFETY
88
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can
be seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where ap-
propriate) are necessary for your protection
in all collisions. They also help keep you in
position, away from an inflating Side Air
Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with
their backs against the seats. Children
must be properly restrained in a child re-
straint or booster seat that is appropriate
for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window . Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
rollover events. The ORC determines whether
the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a par-
ticular rollover event is appropriate, based on
the severity and type of collision. Vehicle dam-
age by itself is not a good indicator of whether or
not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover
events. The rollover sensing system determines
if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event
the vehicle experiences a rollover or near roll-
over event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags
is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both
sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
89
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate imme-
diately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor . They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However , if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a nor -
mal by-product of the process that generates
the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.
These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water . For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor . If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-
ers cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
and the seat belt retractor assemblies re-
placed by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
SAFETY
90
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
ORC will determine whether to have the En-
hanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If
Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 min-
utes from the intervention of the Enhanced
Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater , Turn off the
HV AC Blower Motor , Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
– Engine
– Electric Motor (if equipped)
– Electric power steering
– Brake booster
– Electric park brake
– Automatic transmission gear selector
– Horn
– Front wiper
– Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and re-
move the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and start-
ing the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below . If
you have any doubt, please see an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the en-
gine compartment and fuel tank before reset-
ting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. Y ou could be injured if the air bag
system is not there to protect you. Do not
modify the components or wiring, includ-
ing adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument
panel. Do not modify the front bumper ,
vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
91
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be ser -
viced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems per -
formed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under -
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur .
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving con-
ditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gen-
der, age, and crash location) are recorded. How-
ever, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every
Canadian province, requires that small children
ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law ,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
SAFETY
92
Children 12 years or younger should ride prop-
erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats rather
than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can be-
come a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured
WARNING!
or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’ s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’ s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the
child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. Y ou should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.safercar .gov/parents/index.htm or call:
1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, fac-
ing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown
the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’ s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
V ehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
93
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or
until they reach either the height or weight limit of
their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child
restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers
and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear -facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit
of the infant carrier . Convertible child seats can
be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in
the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear -facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear -facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear -facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
WARNING!
injury to a child 12 years or younger , in-
cluding a child in a rear -facing child re-
straint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-
facing child seats and convertible child seats
used in the forward-facing direction are for chil-
dren who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit
of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Chil-
dren should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to
the highest weight or height allowed by the child
seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should
use a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly . If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’ s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be
badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat for-
ward or rearward because it can loosen the
child restraint attachments. Remove the
child restraint before adjusting the vehicle
seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause se-
rious personal injury.
SAFETY
94
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’ s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’ s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’ s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the
lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly .
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat
belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear -Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
XX
Rear -Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
95
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the
back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages
are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’ s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchor -
age but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child re-
straint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchor -
ages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY
96
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used to-
gether to attach a rear -facing or forward-facing child re-
straint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear -facing or forward-facing child re-
straint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
See your child restraint owner’ s manual for more informa-
tion.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center position only may be removed.
97
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. Y ou will easily feel them if you run your
finger along the gap between the seatback and
seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located in the panel
between the rear seatback and the rear window .
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or connector
to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to
tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a
hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it
is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center posi-
tion blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for
the outboard position, do not use that outboard
position. If a child seat in the center position
blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to at-
tach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint” for typical installation in-
structions.
Always follow the directions of the child re-
straint manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here.
LATCH Anchorage Locations
Tether Strap Anchorages
SAFETY
98
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Re-
straint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt,
stow the seat belt, following the instructions
below. See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower an-
chorages for that seating position. For some
second row seats, you may need to recline
the seat and / or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. Y ou may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, con-
nect it to the top tether anchorage. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor . Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’ s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child re-
straint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in
the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when in-
stalling an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
99
Installing Child Restraints Using The Ve-
hicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be se-
cured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’ s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to
keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around
the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting
the webbing retract back into the retractor . If it
is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
while the webbing is pulled back into the retrac-
tor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” de-
scription in “Switchable Automatic Locking Re-
tractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY
100
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
W eight limit of the Child Re-
straint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child re-
straint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center Only may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be se-
cured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’ s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row seats,
you may need to recline the seat and/or raise
the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. Y ou may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor . As the webbing re-
tracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
101
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If
it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child re-
straint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Us-
ing the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions
to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear -facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear -facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for
the location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor
directly behind the seat where you are plac-
ing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head re-
straints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the two posts. If
not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
SAFETY
102
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
5.
Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’ s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and pos-
sible injury to the child. Use only the an-
chorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
Center Tether Attachment
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to
the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the center tether anchorage lo-
cated in the panel between the rear seatback
and the rear window.
4.
Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a passen-
ger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT P ASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather . Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover A — Tether Strap
Hook
3 — Attaching
Strap
B — Tether Anchor
103
WARNING!
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate con-
trol BLOWER switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
WARNING!
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your heat-
ing or cooling controls to force outside air
into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the under-
side or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a
competent mechanic inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for bro-
ken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passen-
ger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, check-
ing for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged
parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system in-
spected at your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag System has been detected. It will
SAFETY
104
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have your authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. Y ou
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See your authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your ve-
hicle. Only use a floor mat that does not inter -
fere with the operation of the accelerator , brake
or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is
securely attached using the floor mat fasteners
so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator , brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to inter-
fere with the accelerator , brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over . Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER in-
stall or stack an additional floor mat on top
of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured
to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• ONLY use the driver’ s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor ,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’ s side floor mat on
the passenger’ s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’ s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator , brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
105
WARNING!
to the floor and check the floor mat fasten-
ers are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully
depress each pedal to check for interfer -
ence with the accelerator , brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and un-
even wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam indi-
cator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH
when using “Track-Use” parts and equip-
ment:
• NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment
on public roads. FCA US LLC does not
authorize the use of “Track-Use” equip-
ment on public roads.
WARNING!
• The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is
for race vehicles on race tracks. To help
ensure the safety of the race driver , engi-
neers should supervise the installation of
“Track-Use” parts.
• FCA US LLC does not authorize the instal-
lation or use of any part noted as “Track-
Use” on any new vehicle prior to its first
retail sale.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equip-
ment before driving on public roads.
• ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat
belts when driving on public roads.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. Y ou can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
SAFETY
106
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .............108
Normal Starting ................108
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .109
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
SRT .......................110
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..........111
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission. . . .112
DRIVE MODES — SRT ..............116
Launch Control — If Equipped .......116
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL ....................117
SPEED CONTROL.................117
To Activate ..................118
To Set A Desired Speed ...........118
To Vary The Speed Setting .........118
To Accelerate For Passing ..........119
To Resume Speed ..............119
To Deactivate .................119
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) .......120
Activation ...................120
To Set A Desired ACC Speed ........120
To Vary The ACC Speed ...........121
To Resume...................122
Deactivation .................122
Setting The Following Distance .......122
Changing Modes (ACC Only).........123
General Information .............124
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST.........124
LANESENSE ...................125
LaneSense Operation.............125
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ........125
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA.......126
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ............127
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . .128
Materials Added To Fuel ..........128
TRAILER TOWING ................129
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
W eight Ratings) ................129
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME,
ETC.) ......................129
STARTING AND OPERATING
107
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF”
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector .
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and
do not leave the ignition (of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather . Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in P ARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while push-
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the button
again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE ST ART/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in P ARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode until
the gear selector is in P ARK and the button
is pushed twice to the OFF mode. If the gear
selector is not in P ARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once, the
instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the P ARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, push and
release the ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button with
the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h) before
the engine will shut off, and the ignition will
STARTING AND OPERATING
108
remain in the ACC position. The system will
automatically time out and the ignition will
cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of
inactivity if the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) mode and the transmission
is in P ARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode.
4. Push the ENGINE ST AR T/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode.
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
For vehicles equipped with the 3.6L or 5.7L use
the following engine break-in recommenda-
tions:
A long break-in period is not required for the
drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and
rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. However , wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle
lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant
changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate and conditions under which vehicle
operations will occur . For the recommended
viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Min-
eral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as an indica-
tion of difficulty. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in
period. Add oil as required.
For vehicles equipped with the 6.4L use the
following engine break-in recommendations:
Despite modern technology and W orld Class
manufacturing methods, the moving parts of
the vehicle must still wear in with each other .
This wearing in occurs mainly during the first
500 miles (805 km) and continues through the
first oil change interval.
109
It is recommended for the operator to observe
the following driving behaviors during the new
vehicle break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for
an extended period of time.
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not
more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than
3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph
(88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not
more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration
in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than
5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph
(112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting
manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher
rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the
accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph
(136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driv-
ing schools, or similar activities during the
first 1500 miles (2414 km).
NOTE:
Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be
higher through the first oil change interval.
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS — SRT
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining
optimum performance and maximum durability
for your new vehicle.
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining
optimum performance and maximum durability
for your new SRT vehicle.
Despite modern technology and W orld Class
manufacturing methods, the moving parts of
the vehicle must still wear in with each other .
This wearing in occurs mainly during the first
500 miles (805 km) and continues through the
first oil change interval.
It is recommended for the operator to observe
the following driving behaviors during the new
vehicle break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for
an extended period of time.
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not
more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than
3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph
(88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
STARTING AND OPERATING
110
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not
more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration
in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than
5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph
(112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting
manually at higher rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the
accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph
(136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driv-
ing schools, or similar activities during the
first 1500 miles (2414 km).
NOTE:
Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be
higher through the first oil change interval. Run-
ning the engine with an oil level below the add
mark can cause severe engine damage.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the P ARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the ve-
hicle to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the transmission gear selec-
tor out of P ARK with the brake pedal re-
leased. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting
to P ARK, and verify that the transmission
gear position indicator solidly indicates
WARNING!
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before
exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting
a vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into P ARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
111
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, re-
move the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow-
ing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector .
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could op-
erate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into or out of P ARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
• Do not shift between P ARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear , make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting the
vehicle to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the transmission gear selec-
tor out of P ARK with the brake pedal re-
leased. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting
to P ARK, and verify that the transmission
gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, be-
fore exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING
112
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting
a vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into P ARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, re-
move the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow-
ing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector .
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
WARNING!
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could op-
erate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is dis-
played both on the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster .
To select a gear range, press the lock button on
the gear selector and move the selector rearward
or forward. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the
brake pedal must be pressed. Y ou must also
press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL
into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects P ARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink con-
tinuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a
new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and precision shifts will de-
velop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Transmission Gear Selector
1 — Lock Button
2 — Gear Selector
113
Only shift from DRIVE to P ARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL
(Autostick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the Autostick shift control. Toggling
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (be-
side the DRIVE position) will manually select
the transmission gear , and will display the cur -
rent gear in the instrument cluster as M1, M2,
M3, etc, Refer to "AutoStick" in this section for
further information.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL
(AutoStick, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE po-
sition). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the gear
selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] posi-
tion) for access to P ARK, REVERSE, and NEU-
TRAL.
Refer to Automatic Transmission in the Owner’ s
Manual for further details.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver -interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick al-
lows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate
undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slip-
pery conditions, mountain driving, trailer tow-
ing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the DRIVE (D)
position, the transmission will operate auto-
matically, shifting between the eight available
gears. To activate AutoStick, move the gear
selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside
the DRIVE position). The current transmission
gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster ,
along with a highlighted "M" (Manual) indica-
tion. When the gear selector is in the MANUAL
(M) position, tap the gear selector forward (-) (or
tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel, if
equipped) to downshift the transmission to the
next lower gear, or tap the lever rearward (+) (or
tap the (+) shift paddle, if equipped) to com-
mand an upshift.
NOTE:
• Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted
shift paddles (+/-), if equipped, while the gear
selector is in DRIVE, will activate a temporary
AutoStick mode. Tapping (-) to enter
AutoStick mode will downshift the transmis-
sion to the next lower gear , while tapping (+)
to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current
gear. The current gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster , but the "M" will not be
Shifter Paddles
1 — (–) Shift Paddle
2 — (+) Shift Paddle
STARTING AND OPERATING
114
highlighted. The transmission will revert back
to normal operation (if the gear selector re-
mains in DRIVE) after a period of time, de-
pending on accelerator pedal activity.
• In some models, the shift paddles may be
disabled (or re-enabled, as desired) using the
Drive Mode Set-Up, accessed by selecting
Performance Control from the Apps menu in
the Uconnect screen.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift
up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by
the driver (using the gear selector , or the shift
paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine lug-
ging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift
or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
• In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector in
DRIVE), the transmission will automatically
shift up when maximum engine speed is
reached. If the accelerator is fully depressed,
the transmission will downshift when possible
(based on current vehicle speed and gear ,
except 6.2L and 6.4L models). Lack of accel-
erator pedal activity will cause the transmis-
sion to revert to automatic operation.
• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear
selector in MANUAL position), manual gear
selection will be maintained until the gear
selector is returned to DRIVE, or as described
below. The transmission will not upshift auto-
matically at redline in this mode, nor will
downshifts be obtained if the accelerator
pedal is pressed to the floor .
• The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lug-
ging) and will display the current gear .
• The transmission will automatically downshift
to first gear when coming to a stop. After a
stop, the driver should manually upshift (+)
the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
• Y ou can start out, from a stop, in first or
second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow
starting in second gear . Starting out in second
gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur .
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if
equipped), or holding the gear selector in the
(-) position, will downshift the transmission to
the lowest gear possible at the current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position, or press and hold
the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, and the gear
selector is already in DRIVE) until “D” is once
again indicated in the instrument cluster. Y ou
can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could
skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
115
DRIVE MODES — SRT
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive
Mode feature. This feature gives the driver con-
trol over the systems in the vehicle which affect
its performance, enabling the driver to tune it
for desired driving scenarios.
NOTE:
Refer to “SR T Drive Modes” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner’s Manual for further descriptions of
these modes.
Launch Control — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control
system that is designed to allow the driver to
achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a
straight line. Launch Control is a form of traction
control that manages tire slip while launching the
vehicle. This feature is intended for use during race
events on a closed course where consistent quarter
mile (400m) and 0 to 60 (100km/h) times are
desired. The system is not intended to compensate
for lack of driver experience or familiarity with the
race track. Use of this feature in low traction (cold,
wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may results in excess
wheel slip outside this systems control resulting in
an aborted launch.
NOTE:
Launch control is not available within the first
500 miles (804 km) of engine break-in.
Preconditions:
• Launch control should not be used on public
roads. Always check track conditions and the
surrounding area.
• Launch Control should only be used when the
engine and transmission are at operating tem-
perature.
• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry,
paved road surfaces only. Use on slippery or
loose surfaces may cause damage to vehicle
components and is not recommended.
Launch Control is available when the following
procedure is followed:
1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center
stack switch bank.
NOTE:
Pushing the SRT button on the center stack
or pressing Race Options within Drive
Modes, then selecting the Launch Control
tab, followed by the soft, Launch Control
button are two other options to access
launch control features. Please refer to “SRT
Drive Modes” in “Multimedia” in the Own-
er’s Manual, or the “Drive Modes Supple-
ment”, for further information.
2. Push the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on
the touchscreen. This screen will allow you
to adjust your launch RPM’ s for optimum
launch/traction.
3. Push the “Activate Launch Control” button
on the touchscreen.
4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing
straight.
6. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is
in “DRIVE” or “AutoStick” position.
7. While holding the brake, rapidly apply and
hold the accelerator pedal to wide open
throttle. The engine speed will hold at the
RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM
Set-up” screen.
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument cluster
to inform the driver if one or more of the above
conditions have not been met.
STARTING AND OPERATING
116
8. When conditions 4 through 7 have been
met, the instrument cluster display will read
“Launch Ready Release Brake”.
9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle
reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the
ESC system will return to its current ESC mode.
Launch control will abort before launch comple-
tion, display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster
under any the following conditions:
•
The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
ESC system continues in ESC Full ON.
•
The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no
longer moving in a straight line.
•
The “ESC OFF” button is pushed to change
the system to another mode.
NOTE:
After launch control has been aborted, ESC will
return to its current ESC mode.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels
are spinning and do not have traction. Dam-
age to the transmission may occur .
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT
PERFORMANCE CONTROL
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode
feature. This mode is a configuration set up for
typical enthusiast driving. The engine, trans-
mission, and steering systems are all set to their
SPOR T settings. Sport Mode will provide im-
proved throttle response and modified shifting
for an enhanced driving experience, as well the
greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may
be activated and deactivated by pushing the
Sport button on the instrument panel switch
bank.
For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes or a
“SUPER TRACK PACK” button, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual for further details, or in the
“Drive Mode Supplement” within your Owner’s
information kit for further information.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Switches
1 — Push Cancel
2 — Push Set (+)/Accel
3 — Push Resume
4 — Push On/Off
5 — Push Set (-)/Decel
117
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down
if multiple Speed Control functions are oper-
ated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control System can be reactivated by pushing
the Speed Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Con-
trol. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in
the instrument cluster display to indicate the
Speed Control is on. To turn the system off, push
the on/off button a second time. “CRUISE CON-
TROL OFF” will appear in the instrument cluster
display to indicate the Speed Control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. Y ou could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster
than you want. Y ou could lose control and
have an accident. Always leave the system
OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET
(+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a
message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h)” will appear indicating what speed was
set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with set
speed will also appear and stay on in the instru-
ment cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display . Refer to
“Getting To Know Y our Instrument Panel” in
your Owner’s Manual for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on
the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the but-
ton is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the but-
ton is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
STARTING AND OPERATING
118
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Y our Instrument Panel” in
your Owner’ s Manual for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependant on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the but-
ton is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the but-
ton is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally .
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on mod-
erate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the condi-
tions, and you could lose control and have an
accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory .
119
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Control, the controls operate exactly the same
as Speed Control with only a couple of differ -
ences. With this option, you can set a specified
distance you would like to maintain between
you and the vehicle in front of you.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or acceleration auto-
matically to maintain a preset following dis-
tance, while matching the speed of the vehicle
ahead.
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of
you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
Activation
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button.
“ACC READY” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the ACC is on.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
display the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is
set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity .
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If
you do not, the vehicle may continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will dis-
play in the instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the dis-
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be deter -
mined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
Adaptive Cruise Switches
1—
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
2 — Distance Setting – Decrease
3 — Distance Setting – Increase
STARTING AND OPERATING
120
To Vary The ACC Speed
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Y our In-
strument Panel” in your Owner’ s Manual for
further information. The speed increment
shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be de-
creased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Y our In-
strument Panel” in your Owner’ s Manual for
further details. The speed decrement shown is
dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET
(-)
button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the in-
strument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the in-
strument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to deceler -
ate, if the engine’ s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
121
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a
full stop when following a target vehicle. If an
ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a
standstill, the host vehicle will release the
vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a
full stop.
•
The ACC system maintains set speed when driv-
ing up hill and down hill. However , a slight speed
change on moderate hills is normal. In addition,
downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or
descending downhill. This is normal operation
and necessary to maintain set speed. When driv-
ing up hill and down hill, the ACC system will
cancel if the braking temperature exceeds nor-
mal range (overheated).
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close
proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for prevail-
ing traffic and road conditions could cause the
vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply
for safe operation. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Deactivation
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button a second time to turn the
system off.
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off” will appear
in the instrument cluster display to indicate the
ACC is off.
WARNING!
Leaving the ACC system on when not in use is
dangerous. Y ou could accidentally set the sys-
tem or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
Setting The Following Distance
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (me-
dium) and one bar (short). Using this distance
setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates
and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting appears in the instrument clus-
ter display.
• To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting—Increase button and re-
lease. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
• To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting—Decrease button and re-
lease. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
STARTING AND OPERATING
122
Changing Modes (ACC Only)
If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode
can be turned off and the system can be oper -
ated as Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode. While in the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control mode the distance setting feature will
be disabled and the system will maintain the
speed you set.
• To change between the different cruise control
modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC and
the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
• Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control mode.
Refer to your Owner’ s Manual for further details.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed, dis-
WARNING!
tance to the vehicle ahead; and, most impor-
tantly, brake operation to ensure safe opera-
tion of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a dis-
abled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be lim-
ited upon adverse sight distance condi-
tions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop posi-
tion. If the target vehicle does not start
moving within two seconds the ACC sys-
WARNING!
tem will display a message that the system
will release the brakes and that the brakes
must be applied manually . An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are re-
leased.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway con-
struction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are wind-
ing, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-
taining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For
123
WARNING!
additional information, refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
your Owner’ s Manual.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware
of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Control buttons. The two control modes func-
tion differently. Always confirm which mode
is selected.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides vi-
sual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear bumper and a detected ob-
stacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking
maneuver.
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
NOTE:
ParkSense will retain the last system state (en-
abled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is en-
abled at this gear selector position, the system
will remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less
than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the ve-
hicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
NOTE:
• The sensors can detect obstacles from ap-
proximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear bumper
while the vehicle is in REVERSE, a warning
will display in the instrument cluster display
only when “Sound and Display” is selected
from the Uconnect System.
• As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the instrument cluster display will show fewer
arcs and the sound tone will change from
slow, to fast, to continuous.
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further infor -
mation.
STARTING AND OPERATING
124
LANESENSE
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a for -
ward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system pro-
vides a haptic warning in the form of torque
applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out
of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane
marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides visual and haptic warnings
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’ s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible warning to the driver when the driver’ s
hands are not detected on the steering wheel.
The system will cancel if the driver does not
return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off.
The LaneSense button is located on the center
stack below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense
system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED
turns off). A “Lane-
Sense On” message is
shown in the instrument
cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last sys-
tem state, on or off, from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
125
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP
CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is located
on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate. The image will be displayed in the touch-
screen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual for further details.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera
Delay feature and it is turned on, the rear cam-
era image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE.
However, this feature is canceled if the forward
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into P ARK, the vehicle's
ignition is cycled to OFF, or by pressing the
image defeat [X] button.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera Delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the last touchscreen appears
again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position. The active guide lines
will show separate zones that will help indicate
the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are re-
WARNING!
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while
backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The
ParkView camera is unable to view every
obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow , ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water , and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
STARTING AND OPERATING
126
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (lo-
cated in the driver's door map pocket).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly
push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup
and re-release the fuel door using the inside
release button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door
inside the pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe
– the nozzle opens and holds the flapper
door while refueling.
NOTE:
Only the correct size nozzle opens the
latches allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to
allow nozzle to drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
NOTE:
A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow
for emergency refueling with a gas can.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and fed-
eral fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a ve-
hicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Door Release Button
Emergency Fuel Funnel
127
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door , use
the fuel filler door emergency release located in
the trunk.
Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in
case of an emergency:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left
side inner trim panel).
3. Pull the release cable.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline con-
tains a higher level of
detergents to further
aide in minimizing en-
gine and fuel system
deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER De-
tergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these mate-
rials intended for gum and varnish removal may
contain active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Fuel Door Emergency Release
STARTING AND OPERATING
128
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt.
3.6L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Trailer towing with the 6.4L or 6.2L Super-
charged engine is not recommended.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED.
The only acceptable method for towing this
vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
129
130
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT ..............132
Replacement Bulbs..............132
FUSES ......................133
General Information .............134
Underhood Fuses ...............134
Rear Interior Fuses ..............136
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING..........140
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .....140
Preparations For Jacking ...........141
Jacking And Changing A Tire ........142
Road Tire Installation.............144
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED.......144
Tire Service Kit Storage ...........144
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation ...................145
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .....145
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .....146
BATTERY LOCATION ...............150
JUMP STARTING .................150
Preparations For Jump Start.........150
Jump Starting Procedure ..........151
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ..........152
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED TRANSMIS-
SION .......................153
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...........154
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .........155
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models .......156
Rear -Wheel Drive (RWD) Models ......156
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ......................156
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .........157
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
131
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or
glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are
not approved and should not be used for re-
placement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cup Holder LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
132
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low/High Beam Headlamp (Standard Halogen Bi Function Projector) 9005SL+
Low/High Beam Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (Premium HID Bi
Function Projector)
D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
License LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material.
Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker
WARNING!
cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper
fuses may result in serious personal injury ,
fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer .
WARNING!
• If a general protection fuse for safety sys-
tems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
133
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery dis-
charge.
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located
in the engine compartment. This module con-
tains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and
descriptions are printed on the inside of the
power distribution center cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution
center cover , it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
CAUTION!
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system fail-
ure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor-
tant to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow , it
indicates a problem in the circuit that
must be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 – – Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
3 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped
4 30 Amp Pink – Starter
5 40 Amp Green – Anti Lock Brake
6 30 Amp Pink – Anti Lock Brake
7 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
8 50 Amp Red / 20 Amp
Blue
– Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
9 – 20 Amp Y ellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
134
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
10 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion MOD (300) – If Equipped / Under Hood Lamp – Police
11 – 20 Amp Y ellow Horns
12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
13 – – Fuse – Spare
14 – – Fuse – Spare
15 – 20 Amp Y ellow Left HID – If Equipped
16 – 20 Amp Y ellow Right HID – If Equipped
18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped
20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
21 30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
– Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
22 40 Amp Green / 20 Amp
Blue – Police
– Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed # 3
23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
24 50 Amp Red / 20 Amp
Blue
– Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
28 – – Fuse – Spare
29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module (Challenger/Charger Police) / Electronic
Shift Module (Challenger)
30 – – Fuse – Spare
31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
32 – – Fuse – Spare
33 – – Fuse – Spare
135
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
34 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain #1
35 – 20 Amp Y ellow Powertrain #2
36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module
37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays (Charger/300) / Electric Power Steer-
ing Module (Charger/300) / 5-Speed TCM
38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
39 – 10 Amp Red EPS (Challenger) / EHPS (Police) / AC Clutch Relay / Vacuum Pump
Relay / Rad Fan Relays (Challenger)
48 – 10 Amp Red A WD Module/Front Axle Disconnect – If Equipped
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Y ellow V acuum Pump
52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped
53 – – Fuse – Spare
Rear Interior Fuses
There is also a power distribution center located
in the trunk under the spare tire access panel.
This center contains fuses and relays. Fuse
cavity location and descriptions are printed on
the inside of the power distribution center cover .
CAUTION!
•
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure
to do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
CAUTION!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct amper-
age rating. The use of a fuse with a rating
other than indicated may result in a danger -
ous electrical system overload. If a properly
rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
136
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
2 60 Amp Y ellow – Front PDC Feed #1
3 – – Fuse – Spare
4 60 Amp Y ellow – Front PDC Feed #2
5
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
– Sunroof/Dome Lamp – Police
6 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
7 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
8 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
9 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Module
11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control Module
12 – 20 Amp Y ellow Dual USB Center Console Rear/Cigar Lighter IP – If Equipped
15 40 Amp Green – HV AC Blower
16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police
17 20 Amp Blue – Right Spot Lamp – Police
18 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface – Police
19 – – Fuse – Spare
20 – – Fuse – Spare
21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L SRT Demon)
22 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Gateway Mod
23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor
137
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
26
– 15 Amp Blue Cygnus Transmission Module (Charger/300) / Electronic Shift Module
(Charger/300)
27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If Equipped
31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats – If Equipped
32 – 15 Amp Blue HV AC Module/Cluster
33 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch/RF Hub Module/Steering Column Lock (300) – If Equipped
34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module/Clock (300)
35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
36 – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust Valve – If Equipped
37 – 20 Amp Y ellow Radio
38 – 20 Amp Y ellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest/Console Media Hub
40 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (6.2L SR T Demon – If Equipped)
41 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (6.2L SR T Demon – If Equipped)
42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
43
– 20 Amp Y ellow Comfort Seat And Steering Wheel Module (Heated Steering Wheel/RR Heated
Seats)
44 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera
45
– 15 Amp Blue Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass (Charger/300) / Humidity Sensor / Forward
Facing Camera (Lane Departure) / Cyber Gateway
46 – – Fuse – Spare
47 – 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting / Day Time Running Lamps – If Equipped
48 – 20 Amp Y ellow Active Suspension – (6.4L / 6.2L)
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
138
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
51 – 20 Amp Y ellow Front Heated / Vented Seats – If Equipped
52 – 10 Amp Red Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches – If Equipped
53 – 10 Amp Red HV AC Module/In V ehicle Temperature Sensor
54 – – Fuse – Spare
55 – – Fuse – Spare
56 – – Fuse – Spare
57 – – Fuse – Spare
58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
59 – 20 Amp Y ellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
60 – – Fuse – Spare
61 – – Fuse – Spare
62 – – Fuse – Spare
63 – – Fuse – Spare
64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/300)
65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
66 – – Fuse – Spare
67 – 10 Amp Red Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof / Inside RR View Mirror / Police Run Acc Relay
68 – 10 Amp Red
Dual USB Power Outlet – R/A Sense (Charger/300) Rear Sunshade (Charger/
300) RR USB Timer
69 – – Fuse – Spare
70 – – Fuse – Spare
139
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is danger -
ous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and
fall on you. Y ou could be crushed. Never
put any part of your body under a vehicle
that is on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only . The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service pur -
poses. The vehicle should be jacked on a
firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under
an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps
to access the jack and spare tire.
NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack coun-
terclockwise to remove it.
Spare Tire/Tools Location
1 — Jack Beneath Spare Tire
2 — Spare Tire
3 — Pull Strap
Spare Tire Fastener
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
140
6. Remove the wheel chocks, jack and lug
wrench assembly from under the spare tire.
Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the
lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the
jack assembly.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
WARNING!
parts and the spare tire in the places pro-
vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as possible.
Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard W arning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into P ARK.
5. Turn off the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position
using the provided wheel chocks. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire, chock
the left rear wheel. Place both chocks under
the tire.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jack Fastener
Wheel Chocks
141
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard W arning flasher .
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set an
automatic transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway , be ex-
tremely careful of motor traffic.
WARNING!
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, wheel chocks,
and lug wrench.
NOTE:
For SR T Models, the spare tire must be used
for the rear wheel(s) only. For a flat front tire,
move the rear tire to the front and use the
spare tire on the rear.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where
the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the
lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully
before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug
wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug
nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the
lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the
wheel is still on the ground.
Warning Label
Spare Tire Label
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
142
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is
closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is too low for jack placement,
slide the jack on its side and rotate it up into
position.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip
off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise
the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be dam-
aged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly .
NOTE:
•
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt
to install a center cap or wheel cover on
the compact spare.
•
Refer to “Tires—General Information” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” in your
Owner's Manual for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare
tire, its use, and operation.
Rear Jacking Location
Front Jacking Location
Installing Compact Spare
143
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury .
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down
on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for proper lug nut torque.
11. Stow the wheel chocks, jack, tools and flat
tire. Make sure the base of the jack faces
the front of the vehicle before tightening
down the fastener .
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places pro-
vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury .
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF
EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the
tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not
be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be
used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allow-
ing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles
(160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
144
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the fol-
lowing symbols to indicate the air or sealant
mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position
for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air
Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position
to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear
hose) (6) when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release
the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1)
and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration
date (printed at the lower right hand corner on
the bottle label) to assure optimum operation
of the system. Refer to “Sealing A Tire With
Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle
And Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
are a one tire application use and need to be
replaced after each use. Always replace these
components immediately at your original
equipment vehicle dealer .
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water and a damp cloth will re-
move the material from the vehicle or tire and
wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it
can easily be peeled off and properly dis-
carded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before
connecting the Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom
side of the Tire Service Kit)
145
• Y ou can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory Storage
Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump)
for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflat-
able items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select
Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating
such items to avoid injecting sealant into
them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
•
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
WARNING!
– If the tire has any damage from driv-
ing with extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driv-
ing on a flat tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of
the tire or the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Fail-
ure to follow these warnings can result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
•
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair , eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through
the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory
irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
is any contact with clothing.
WARNING!
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or
rash, consult a physician immediately.
Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of chil-
dren. If swallowed, rinse mouth immedi-
ately with plenty of water and drink plenty
of water . Do not induce vomiting! Consult a
physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service
Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.
2. V erify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve stem
and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the
deflated tire and running the air pump. Move
the vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
146
3. Place the transmission in P ARK (auto trans-
mission) or in Gear (manual transmission)
and place the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn
to the Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then re-
move the cap from the fitting at the end of
the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug
into the vehicle’ s 12 V olt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into
The Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in
NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the seal-
ant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) and
into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the
Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant
Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure the
valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check
that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode.
Push the Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or an-
other vehicle, if available. Make sure the
engine is running before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the
Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant
Hose (6).
147
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant
is no longer flowing through the hose (typi-
cally takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant
flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will
decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi
(4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the
Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2.
The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty. Continue to operate the pump and in-
flate the tire to the pressure indicated on the
tire pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar
(recommended pressure). Check the tire pres-
sure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further . Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button (2) to reduce the tire pressure to the rec-
ommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top
of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the
sticker on the instrument panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
(6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on
the fitting at the end of the hose, and place
the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive
V ehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8)
may get hot after use, so it should be
handled carefully.
CAUTION!
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result
in sealant contacting your skin, clothing,
and the vehicle’ s interior . It can also result
in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflat-
ing the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or
ten minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire
Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not ex-
ceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious
or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
148
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever
You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” before con-
tinuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn
to the Air Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle's 12 V olt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color)
and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7)
onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pres-
sure indicated on the tire and loading infor -
mation label on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure
to the recommended inflation pressure be-
fore continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper stor-
age area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or re-
placed at the earliest opportunity at an au-
thorized dealer or tire service center .
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
instrument panel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) assembly at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle
And Hose Replacement”.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has
been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release but-
ton in the recessed area under the sealant
bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The
Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the
bottle and dispose of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire
Service Kit housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the
housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns
with the hose slot in the front of the housing.
Push the bottle into the housing. An audible
click will be heard indicating the bottle is
locked into place.
6. V erify that the cap is installed on the fitting
at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return
the hose to its storage area (located on the
bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage
location in the vehicle.
149
BATTERY LOCATION
The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery posts are located on
the right side of the engine compartment for
jump starting.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system volt-
age greater than 12 V olts or damage to the
battery, starter motor , alternator or electrical
system may occur .
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instructions
and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery posts are located on
the right side of the engine compartment for
jump starting.
NOTE:
The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the
fender.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. Y ou can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Jump Starting Locations
(+) — Remote Positive Post
(-) — Remote Negative Post
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
150
WARNING!
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate hydro-
gen gas which is flammable and explosive.
Keep open flames or sparks away from the
battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into P ARK and place the igni-
tion in the OFF position.
2. Turn off the heater , radio, and all unneces-
sary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cable’s reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could re-
sult in damage to the charging system of the
booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery .
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in per -
sonal injury . Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
151
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charg-
ing system inspected at an authorized dealer .
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s bat-
tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can re-
duce the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not in-
crease the engine idle speed while preventing
vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine cool-
ing system and turning the A/C off can help
remove this heat.
• Y ou can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator . If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the ve-
hicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on
HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
152
MANUAL PARK RELEASE —
8 SPEED TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in
the driver's seat with your foot firmly on the
brake pedal when activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release
will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
secured by the parking brake, or by proper
connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle
could lead to serious injury or death for those in
or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of P ARK (such as a
dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin.
3. Remove the plastic cover under the bin by
using the slot provided to access the Manual
Park Release lever .
4. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish
the tether strap up through the opening in
the console base.
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
6. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the
center of the lever, and disengage the lever
locking tab by pushing it to the right.
7. While holding the locking tab in the disen-
gaged position, pull the tether strap to rotate
the lever up and rearward, until it locks in
place in the vertical position. The vehicle is
now out of P ARK and can be moved. Release
the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Console Storage Bin
Manual Park Release
1 — Tether Strap
2 — Locking Tab
153
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on
the rear side) rearward (away from the lever)
to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever for-
ward and down, to its original position, until
the locking tab snaps into place to secure
the lever .
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm
that the lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
console. Reinstall the Manual Park Release
cover and the console storage bin.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector .
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pres-
sure that will maintain the rocking motion, with-
out spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
• Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL for more than two sec-
onds, you must press the brake pedal to en-
gage DRIVE or REVERSE.
•
Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial
Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” in
your Owner’ s Manual for further information.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC
Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure dur -
ing prolonged efforts to free a stuck ve-
hicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not
spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may re-
sult.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission overheat-
ing and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
154
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
•30miles(48km)max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used,
same limitations as above)
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
•
Ignition in ON/RUN mode
• Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT in
PARK)
Flatbed
ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further infor-
mation.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bum-
pers or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrost-
ers, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must
be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to "Manual Park
Release" in this section for instructions on shift-
ing the transmission out of P ARK for towing.
155
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission and driveline are operable,
A WD models can also be towed with the ignition in
the ON/RUN mode, the transmission in NEUTRAL
(not in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the ground
with no limitation on speed or distance. Since the
ignition MUST be in the ON/RUN mode to tow in
this manner, A WD vehicles must be towed with
ALL FOUR wheels OFF the ground (e.g. on a
flatbed truck) if the key fob is unavailable.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method
can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage.
• Damage from improper towing is not cov-
ered under the New V ehicle Limited War -
ranty.
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your ve-
hicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using
a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, this vehicle may be
flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground)
under the following conditions:
• The automatic transmission must be in NEU-
TRAL. Refer to "Manual Park Release" in this
section for instructions on shifting the trans-
mission to NEUTRAL when the engine is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the ve-
hicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km),
then the only acceptable method of towing is
with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
W arranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”
in “Safety” for further information on the En-
hanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
156
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’ s systems performed under cer -
tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as
an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”
in “Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
157
158
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .............160
3.6L And 5.7L Engines ...........160
6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engines . . .163
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............167
3.6L Engine .................167
5.7L Engine ..................168
6.2L Supercharged Engine .........169
6.4L Engine ..................170
RAISING THE VEHICLE..............171
TIRES ......................171
Tire Safety Information ...........171
Tires — General Information ........178
Tire Types ...................182
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........183
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........184
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE
QUALITY GRADES ................185
Treadwear ...................186
Traction Grades ................186
Temperature Grades .............186
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
159
SCHEDULED SERVICING
3.6L And 5.7L Engines
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indica-
tor system will remind you that it is time to take
your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-
trips, trailer tow , extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influ-
ence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Severe Oper-
ating Conditions can cause the change oil mes-
sage to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (800 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change
is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the sched-
uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is
performed by someone other than your autho-
rized dealer , the message can be reset by refer -
ring to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in this guide,
or “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Y our Instrument Panel” in your Owner’ s
Manual for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km)
or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off-road environment, or
is operated predominantly at idle or only very
low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of
irregular wear , even if it occurs before your
next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder , and power steering (if
equipped) and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
160
Maintenance Plan — 3.6L And 5.7L
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the
following page for the required maintenance
intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
•
Change oil and filter
•
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even
if it occurs before your next scheduled ser-
vice
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten termi-
nals as required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
hoses and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection
and hoses
•
Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
161
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All Wheel Drive
Only).
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary . X X X X X X X
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
Change the transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the follow-
ing: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel
Drive Only).
XX
Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive
(A WD) change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
XX X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary . X
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
162
** The spark plug change interval is mileage
based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an ac-
cident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM’ s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engines
The scheduled maintenance services listed in
this manual must be done at the times or mile-
ages specified to protect your vehicle warranty
and ensure the best vehicle performance and
reliability. More frequent maintenance may be
needed for vehicles in severe operating condi-
tions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be
done anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-
uled maintenance.
A “Oil Change Required” message will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change
is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (800 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not
monitor the time since the last oil change.
Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six
months since your last oil change, even if the
oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive
your vehicle off-road/track usage for an ex-
tended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or
six months, whichever comes first.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the sched-
uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is
performed by someone other than your autho-
rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer-
ring to the steps described under “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Y our In-
strument Panel” in your Owner’ s Manual for
further information.
163
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine
Compartment” in this chapter for further in-
formation.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add
if required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the
terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering
(6.2L only), and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for
correct operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter .
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance
items may result in damage to the vehicle.
Maintenance Plan — 6.2L And 6.4L
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter . X X XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear , even if it occurs before scheduled mainte-
nance.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
If using your vehicle for any of the following: dusty
or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air
cleaner filter; replace if necessary .
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary . X X X X X X X X XXXX
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X X XXXX
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
164
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Inspect the exhaust system. X X X X X X X X XXXX
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with
four wheel disc brakes.
XXX X X
Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent
trailer towing.
XX X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and boot
seals, for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage,
wear , improper looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Replace the engine air cleaner filter . X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X X XXXX
Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if necessary X
Replace the spark plugs – 6.2L Supercharged Engine
**
XX
Replace the spark plugs – 6.4L Engine ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant/intercooler at
120 months if not done at 150,000 miles
(240,000 km).
XX
165
** The spark plug change interval is mileage
based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a ser -
vice job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an ac-
cident.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
166
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
4 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
167
5.7L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
4 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
168
6.2L Supercharged Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Intercooler Fluid Reservoir 9 — Power Steering Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 11 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 12 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
169
6.4L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
170
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Iden-
tification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Defi-
nitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed to
this standard have the tire size molded into
the sidewall beginning with the section width.
The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on U.S. design standards. The size designa-
tion for LT-Metric tires is the same as for
P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that
are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only . Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size des-
ignation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum
Load
2 — Size Desig-
nation
5 — Maximum
Pressure
3 — Service
Description
6 — Treadwear ,
Traction and
Temperature
Grades
171
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
172
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of
the tire; however , the date code may only be on
one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the
full TIN, including the date code, located on the
white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN
on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found
on the outboard side, then you will find it on the
inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
173
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a mini-
mum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
V ehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’ s loading capacity , the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
174
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, includ-
ing the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly
and inflate to the recommended pressure for
your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. Y ou will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-
sures specified on the Tire and Loading Infor -
mation placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of your Own-
er’s Manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
175
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and
Loading Information placard. The combined
weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never ex-
ceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely ex-
ceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68)
= 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage,
and towing capacities of your vehicle with
varying seating configurations and number
and size of occupants. This table is for illus-
tration purposes only and may not be accurate
for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
176
177
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over-
loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping dis-
tance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can af-
fect vehicle handling and can fail sud-
denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under -inflation and over -inflation affect
the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response or over responsive-
ness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering re-
sponse.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling re-
sistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-
able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door .
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
178
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly in-
flated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from en-
tering the valve stem, which could damage
the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the Win-
ter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be in-
creased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure
will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain-
ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced ve-
hicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum ca-
pacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly . The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
179
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be re-
paired if it meets the following criteria:
•
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
•
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-
tions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 sec-
onds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equip-
ment tires to help you in determining when your
tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be re-
placed. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this
section for further information.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
180
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting
in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher , and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can re-
sult in sudden tire failure. Y ou could lose
control and have a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends
that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size,
quality and performance when replacement is
needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the V ehicle Certifi-
cation Label for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will
be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair . Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’ s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the origi-
nal wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replace-
ment tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
dling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable han-
dling and stress to steering and suspension
components. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes
with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
181
WARNING!
overloading and failure. Y ou could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can re-
sult in sudden tire failure and loss of ve-
hicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a differ -
ent size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer , Fall, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice condi-
tions. You could lose vehicle control, result-
ing in severe injury or death. Driving too fast
for conditions also creates the possibility of
loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent in
size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use
snow tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the
safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sustained
speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds
above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for rec-
ommended safe operating speeds, loading and
cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
182
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of non-
studded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit in-
stead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service
Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use tem-
porary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle
may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an autho-
rized tire dealer for the recommended tire rota-
tion pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. Y ou can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’ s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first op-
portunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at
any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for tem-
porary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim-
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. Y ou can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and Load-
ing Information Placard located on the driver’ s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/
80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first op-
portunity.
183
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump be-
fore lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for tem-
porary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim-
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators,
the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be
replaced. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emer-
gency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity .
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do
not drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’ s side door . Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportu-
nity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to
do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
W ash wheels with the same soap solution rec-
ommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
184
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline addi-
tives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
V ehicle Limited W arranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner
or their equivalent is recommended or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner . These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New V ehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner , drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these spe-
cialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will
permanently damage this finish and such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND W ASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND W ATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all
that is required to maintain this finish.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were
established by the National Highway Traf-
fic Safety Administration. The specific
grade rating assigned by the tire's manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the
sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.
185
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in addi-
tion to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart sig-
nificantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of as-
phalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance, which all passenger vehicle tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Ve-
hicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel, than
the minimum required by law .
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combi-
nation, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
186
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .188
Torque Specifications ............188
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) ......189
E-85 General Information ..........189
FLUID CAPACITIES — DODGE .........189
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT ...........190
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — DODGE ......191
Engine .....................191
Chassis.....................192
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT........193
Engine .....................193
Chassis ....................194
MOPAR ACCESSORIES ..............194
Authentic Accessories By Mopar ......194
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
187
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a high quality six sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Base Model Vehicle
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14x1.50 22mm
SRT Model Vehicle
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
111 Ft-Lbs
(150 N·m)
M14x1.50 22mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recom-
mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any
dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug
nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in personal in-
jury.
Torque Pattern
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
188
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE
ONLY)
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for
Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can
be identified by a unique fuel filler door label
that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline
Only and/or a yellow fuel cap. Refer to the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door
label or a yellow gas cap can operate on
E-85.
FLUID CAPACITIES — DODGE
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine (87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol or up to 85% Ethanol for Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
5.7L Engine (89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
6.4L Engine (91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
6.4L Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Y ear/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) For-
mula or equivalent)
10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
189
U.S. Metric
5.7L Engine – without Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent)
14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
5.7L Engine – with Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent)
15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
6.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent)
15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
6.2L Supercharged Engine (91 Octane or higher , 0-15% Ethanol) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
6.4L Engine (91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.2L Supercharged Engine (SAE 0W -40, Synthetic API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
6.4L Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
6.2L Supercharged Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) 10 Y ear/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent)
15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters
6.2L Supercharged Engine Intercooler (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant con-
forming to MS.90032) 10 Y ear/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent)
5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
6.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent)
15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
190
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — DODGE
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant W e recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Y ear/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Addi-
tive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L/5.7L Engine
W e recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W -20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix Ultra. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 6.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufac-
turer only recommends full synthetic engine oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra Platinum 0W -40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures
Engine Oil Filter W e recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs W e recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine 87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engine 91 Octane or higher , 0-15% Ethanol.
191
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technol-
ogy (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-
CAUTION!
OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is intro-
duced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032),
by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-
CAUTION!
rust products, as they may not be compat-
ible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-
based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission — 8-Speed Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the
correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder W e recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then
DOT 4 is acceptable.
Front Axle – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle – 3.6/5.7 Engine We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle – 6.4L Engine W e recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped) W e recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
192
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine/Intercooler Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Y ear/150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant con-
forming to MS.90032.
Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufac-
turer only recommends full synthetic engine oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra Platinum 0W -40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs W e recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 91 Octane or higher , 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technol-
ogy (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-
CAUTION!
OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is intro-
duced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032),
by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-
CAUTION!
rust products, as they may not be compat-
ible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-
based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
193
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the
correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder W e recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 brake fluid. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
acceptable.
Hydraulic Power Steering Reservoir — If Equipped W e recommend you use Mopar Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or equivalent meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-10838.
Rear Axle We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
MOPAR ACCESSORIES
Authentic Accessories By Mopar
• The following highlights just some of the
many Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar
featuring a fit, finish, and functionality spe-
cifically for your Dodge Charger.
• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain
far more than expressive style, premium pro-
tection, or extreme entertainment, you also
benefit from enhancing your vehicle with ac-
cessories that have been thoroughly tested
and factory-approved.
• For the full line of Authentic Dodge Accesso-
ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership or
online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and
mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
EXTERIOR:
• Rear Spoiler • Custom Wheels • Fog Lights
• Trailer Hitch Receiver And Wire Harness • Graphics Packages • Molded Splash Guards
INTERIOR:
• Premium Carpet Floor Mats • Slush Mats • Bright Pedal Kit
• Door Sill Guards • Premium Carpet Cargo Mat • Katzkin Leather Interiors
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
194
ELECTRONICS:
• Kicker Sound System • Uconnect Phone • Remote Start
• Electronic Vehicle Tracking System (EVTS) • Mopar Connect
PERFORMANCE
• Cold Air Intake • Performance Suspension • Anti Sway Bars
• Scat Pack Performance Packages • Strut Tower Braces
• Kicker is a registered trademark of Stillwater
Designs and Audio, Inc.
195
196
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY ................199
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY ......200
Uconnect 4 At A Glance ..........200
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ............201
Radio .....................202
Android Auto — If Equipped ........203
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped .205
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH 8.4-INCH
DISPLAY .....................206
Uconnect 4C/4C NA V At A Glance .....206
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ............207
Radio .....................208
Android Auto — If Equipped ........209
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
. .213
UCONNECT SETTINGS ..............215
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......216
Left Switch ..................216
Right Switch..................216
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF EQUIPPED .....216
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped (Available
on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display) ....................216
SiriusXM Guardian Activation .......217
Download The Uconnect App ........218
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display) .........218
Maintaining Y our SiriusXM Guardian
Account ....................219
Built-In Features ...............219
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features . . .222
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL .............224
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED .........228
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
V olume .....................228
Finding Points Of Interest ..........230
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name . .230
One-Step Voice Destination Entry......230
Setting Y our Home Location .........230
Home......................231
Adding A Stop.................232
Taking A Detour ................232
SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NA V With
8.4–inch Display) ...............232
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NA V With
8.4–inch Display) ..............232
UCONNECT PHONE ................234
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free
Calling).....................234
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Y our Mobile
Phone To The Uconnect System ......236
Common Phone Commands (Examples) .239
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone
During Call ..................239
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And
V ehicle ....................239
Phonebook ..................240
V oice Command Tips ............240
Changing The Volume ............240
Using Do Not Disturb.............240
Incoming Text Messages ..........241
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To
Improve Bluetooth Performance With Y our
Uconnect System ..............242
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS .242
MULTIMEDIA
197
Introducing Uconnect ............242
Get Started ..................243
Basic Voice Commands ...........244
Radio......................244
Media .....................244
Phone .....................245
V oice Text Reply................246
Climate.....................246
Navigation (4C NA V) .............247
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If
Equipped ...................247
Register (4C/4C NA V) ............248
V ehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NA V) .248
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) ..........248
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NA V) .......249
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ........249
Do Not Disturb ................250
Android Auto — If Equipped ........250
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ........251
General Information .............252
Additional Information ............252
MULTIMEDIA
198
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain se-
curity features to reduce the risk of unauthor-
ized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. V ehicle software
technology continues to evolve over time and
FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evalu-
ates and takes appropriate steps as needed.
Similar to a computer or other devices, your
vehicle may require software updates to im-
prove the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unau-
thorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’ s sys-
tems are breached. It may be possible that
vehicle systems, including safety related
systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual ve-
hicle behavior , take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately .
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
–
Routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com/
support/software-update.html (U.S.
Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Ca-
nadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media de-
vices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communica-
tions cannot be assured. Third parties may un-
lawfully intercept information and private com-
munications without your consent. For further
information, refer to ”Data Collection & Privacy”
in your Uconnect Owner’ s Manual Supplement
or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cyber-
security” in “Getting To Know Y our Instrument
Panel” in your Owner’s Manual.
199
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY
Uconnect 4 At A Glance
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touch-
screen, doing so can result in damage to the
screen.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
Setting The Time
• For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and then
press the time display at the top of the screen.
Press “Y es.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the
“Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen,
then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of
the Clock Setting screen.
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen
to activate the Audio settings screen to adjust
Balance\Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted V ol-
ume, Surround Sound, Loudness, AUX V ol-
ume Offset, Auto Play, and Radio Off With
Door.
• Y ou can return to the Radio screen by pressing
the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between the
rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or press
and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the
Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-
screen, or press and drag over the level bar for
each of the equalizer bands. The level value,
which spans between plus or minus nine, is
displayed at the bottom of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted
V olume is adjusted by pressing the volume
level indicator . This alters the automatic ad-
justment of the audio volume with variation to
vehicle speed.
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio
Screen
MULTIMEDIA
200
Loudness — If Equipped
• Press the “On” button on the touchscreen to
activate Loudness. Press “Off” to deactivate
this feature. When Loudness is On, the sound
quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
• Press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on the
touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Off-
set screen. The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted
by pressing of the “+” and “–” buttons. This
alters the AUX input audio volume. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar .
Auto Play — If Equipped
• Press the “Auto Play” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Auto Play screen. The
Auto Play feature has two settings “On” and
“Off.” With Auto Play on, music begins play-
ing from a connected device, immediately
after it is connected to the radio.
Auto On Radio — If Equipped
• The Radio automatically turns on when ve-
hicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or
off at last ignition off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
• Press the “Radio Off With Door” button on the
touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With
Door screen. The Radio Off With Door feature,
when activated, keeps the radio on until the
driver or passenger door is opened, or when
the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your conve-
nience. Simply follow these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar .
The new app shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar , will now be
an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
201
Radio
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — Main Category Bar
5 — Audio Settings
6 — Seek Up
7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
8 — Seek Down
9 — Browse And Manage Presets
10 — Radio Bands
MULTIMEDIA
202
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. Y ou have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian ser -
vices, and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guard-
ian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio”
button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM)
button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds to
seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once the
arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the
“Tune” button on the screen, and entering the
desired station number .
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see
the 12 preset stations per band, press the arrow
button on the touchscreen at the top right of the
screen to toggle between the two sets of six
presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps
below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button
on the touchscreen for more than two sec-
onds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer . Some Android
Auto features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone and a
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto automatically brings you
useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto can be used with Google's best-in-
class speech technology, the steering wheel
controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio
faceplate, and the radio display’ s touchscreen
to control many of your apps. To use Android
Auto follow the following steps:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Android-powered
smartphone.
2. Connect your Android powered smartphone
to one of the media USB ports in your ve-
hicle. If you have not downloaded the
Android Auto app to your smartphone before
plugging in the device for the first time, the
app begins to download.
203
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
Your phone may ask you to approve the use
of the Android Auto app before use.
3. Once the device is connected and recog-
nized, Android Auto should automatically
launch, but you can also launch it by touch-
ing the Android Auto icon on the touch-
screen, located under Apps.
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communi-
cation
• Hundred of compatible apps, and many more!
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen. Once Android Auto has made a connec-
tion through USB, Android Auto will also con-
nect via Bluetooth.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Android Auto
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
MULTIMEDIA
204
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer . Some Apple Car -
Play features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay,
the smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone
in the car, and stay focused on the road. Use
your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehi-
cle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri
to get access to Apple Music, Maps, Messages,
and more.
To use CarPlay, make sure you are using iPhone
5 or later , have Siri enabled in Settings, that
your iPhone is unlocked for the very first con-
nection only, and then use the following proce-
dure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-
ning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recog-
nized, CarPlay should automatically launch,
but you can also launch it by touching the
CarPlay icon on the touchscreen, located
under Apps.
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cover -
age is shown on the left side of the radio screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Ve-
hicle user interface is a product of Apple
®
.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of
use and privacy statements apply.
CarPlay CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
205
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH
8.4-INCH DISPLAY
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. Y ou have full responsibility and assume
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
features, SiriusXM Guardian services, and ap-
plications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect
features and SiriusXM Guardian services when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touch-
screen, doing so can result in damage to the
screen.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
Setting The Time
• Model 4C NAV synchronizes time automati-
cally via GPS, so it should not require any time
adjustment. If you do need to set the time
manually, follow the instructions below for
Model 4C NA V.
• For Model 4C, turn the unit on, and then press
the time display at the top of the screen. Press
“Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the
“Clock” button on the touchscreen, then
check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of
the Clock Setting screen.
Background Themes
• Screen background themes are selectable
from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d like
to set a theme, follow the instructions below.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen and select the display menu.
• Then press “Set Theme” button on the touch-
screen and select a theme.
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen
to activate the Audio settings screen to adjust
Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed Adjusted
V olume.
• Y ou can return to the Radio screen by pressing
the “X” located at the top right.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio Screen
MULTIMEDIA
206
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between the
rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear ,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or press
and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the
Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-
screen, or press and drag over the level bar for
each of the equalizer bands. The level value,
which spans between plus or minus nine, is
displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted V olume” button on
the touchscreen to activate the Speed Ad-
justed V olume screen. The Speed Adjusted
V olume is adjusted by pressing the volume
level indicator . This alters the automatic ad-
justment of the audio volume with variation to
vehicle speed.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your conve-
nience. Simply follow these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar .
The new app shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar , will now be
an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display Main Menu
207
Radio
Uconnect 4C NAV Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — View Small Navigation Map
5 — HD Radio
6 — Main Category Bar
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
10 — Seek Down
11 — Browse And Manage Presets
12 — Radio Bands
MULTIMEDIA
208
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. Y ou have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian ser -
vices, and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guard-
ian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio”
button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM)
button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds to
seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once the
arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the
“Tune” button on the screen, and entering the
desired station number .
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see
the 12 preset stations per band, press the arrow
button on the touchscreen at the top right of the
screen to toggle between the two sets of six
presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps
below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button
on the touchscreen for more than two sec-
onds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
HD Radio — If Equipped
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C NA V)
operates similar to conventional radio except
it allows broadcasters to transmit a high-
quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is
provided with a clear sound that enhances the
listening experience. HD radio can also trans-
mit data such as song title or artist.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer . Some Android
Auto features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone and a
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto automatically brings you
useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
209
Android Auto can be used with Google's best-in-
class speech technology , the steering wheel
controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio
faceplate, and the radio display’ s touchscreen
to control many of your apps. To use Android
Auto follow these steps:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Android-powered
smartphone.
2. Connect your Android powered smartphone
to one of the media USB ports in your ve-
hicle. If you have not downloaded the
Android Auto app to your smartphone before
plugging in the device for the first time, the
app begins to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
Your phone may ask you to approve the use
of the Android Auto app before use.
3.
Once Android Auto has made a connection
through USB, Android Auto will also connect
via Bluetooth. The system displays the Android
Auto home screen. Android Auto automatically
launches, but if it does not, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for the
procedure to enable the feature “AutoShow .”
You can also launch it by pressing Android Auto
located in the “Apps” menu. If you use Android
Auto frequently you can move the app to the
menu bar at the bottom of the touchscreen.
Press the “Apps” button and locate the
Android Auto app; then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar .
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communi-
cation
• Hundred of compatible apps, and many more!
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Android Auto may use cel-
lular data and your cellular coverage is shown in
the upper right corner of the radio screen.
Android Auto
MULTIMEDIA
210
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play . Android, Android Auto and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google
to take you to a desired destination by voice. You
can also touch the Navigation icon in Android
Auto to access Google Maps.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any
spoken navigation command launches the
built-in Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto, Google Maps pro-
vides voice-guided:
• Navigation
• Live traffic information
• Lane guidance
NOTE:
If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation
system, and you try and start a new route using
Android Auto, via voice or any other method, a
pop-up appears asking if you would like to
switch from Uconnect navigation to smartphone
navigation. A pop-up also appears, asking if
you’d like to switch, if Android Auto is currently
in use and you attempt to launch a built-in
Uconnect route. Selecting “Y es” switches the
navigation type to the newly used method of
navigation and a route is planned for the new
destination. If “No” is selected the navigation
type remains unchanged.
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (U.S. Residents) or
https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Ca-
nadian Residents).
For further information on the navigation function,
please refer to
https://support.google.com/
android or https://support.google.com/
androidauto/.
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
Google Maps
211
Music
Android Auto allows you to access and stream
your favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream endless
music on the road.
NOTE:
For music apps, playlists, and stations to work
with Android Auto, they must be set up on your
smartphone before using Android Auto.
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto, select the Uconnect Sys-
tem’s media screen.
For further information refer to
https://support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto connected, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
voice recognition specific to the Android Auto.
This will allow you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free
calls.
Apps
The Android Auto App will display all the com-
patible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto, every time it is launched. Y ou
must have the compatible app downloaded, and
you must be signed in to the app for it to work
with Android Auto. Refer to g.co/androidauto to
see the latest list of available apps for Android
Auto.
Android Auto Music
Android Auto Contact
Android Auto Phone
MULTIMEDIA
212
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer . Some Apple Car -
Play features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay,
the smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone
in the car, and stay focused on the road. Use
your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehi-
cle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri
to get access to Apple Music, Maps, Messages,
and more.
To use CarPlay, make sure you are using iPhone
5 or later , have Siri enabled in Settings, that
your iPhone is unlocked for the very first con-
nection only, and then use the following proce-
dure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-
ning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected, the system
displays the CarPlay home screen. Apple
CarPlay automatically launches, but if not,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’ s Manual
Supplement for the procedure to enable the
feature “AutoShow.” You can also launch it
by pressing the CarPlay icon located in the
“Apps” menu. If you use Apple CarPlay fre-
quently you can move the app to the menu
bar at the bottom of the touchscreen. Press
the “Apps” button and locate the CarPlay
app; then drag and drop the selected App to
replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar .
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cover -
age is shown on the left side of the radio screen.
CarPlay
CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
213
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. V e-
hicle user interface is a product of Apple
®
.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of
use and privacy statements apply.
Phone
With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button on
the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recog-
nition session. Y ou can also press and hold the
Home button within CarPlay to start talking to
Siri. This allows you to make calls or listen to
voice mail as you normally would using Siri on
your iPhone.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in VR session,
not a Siri session, and it will not function with
CarPlay.
Music
CarPlay allows you to access all your artists,
playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your
iPhone’s data plan, you can also use select third
party audio apps including music, news, sports,
podcasts and more.
Messages
Just like your iPhone, CarPlay allows you to use
Siri to send or reply to text messages. Since
everything is done by voice, Siri can also read
incoming text messages do you don’t have to.
Maps
To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your
Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push
and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to
use Siri to set your desired destination. Alterna-
tively, choose a Nearby destination by pressing
Destinations and selecting a category, by
launching Siri from the destinations page, or
even by typing in a destination.
Apple Music
Maps
MULTIMEDIA
214
NOTE:
• If the VR button is not held, and is only
pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts
you and any navigation command said
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
•
If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation
system, and you try and start a new route using
CarPlay, via voice or any other method, a pop-up
appears asking if you would like to switch from
Uconnect navigation to iPhone navigation. A
pop-up also appears, asking if you’d like to
switch, if CarPlay navigation is currently in use
and you attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect
route. Selecting “Y es” switches the navigation
type to the newly used method of navigation and
a route will be planned for the new destination. If
“No” is selected the navigation type remains
unchanged.
Apps
To use an app that is compatible with CarPlay ,
you must have the compatible app already
downloaded to your iPhone and you must also
be signed in. Refer to http://www.apple.com/
ios/carplay/ (U.S. Residents) or
https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Cana-
dian Residents) to see the latest list of available
apps for CarPlay.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system allows you to access Cus-
tomer Programmable feature settings such as
Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings,
Clear Personal Data, System Information, and
Compass Settings (if equipped) through buttons
on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If equipped with the Super Track Pak option
please refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement”
for further descriptions of these modes.
• Press the “Controls” button located near the
bottom of the touchscreen, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to ac-
cess the Settings screen. When making a
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred
setting is highlighted, then press and release
Navigation Pop-Up
215
the preferred setting until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. The following feature set-
tings are available:
• Language • Auto-On Comfort
• Display • Doors & Locks
• Units • Engine Off Options
• Voice • Audio
• Clock • Phone/Bluetooth
• Camera • SiriusXM Setup
• Safety & Driving
Assistance
• Reset Settings
• Mirrors & Wipers •
System Information
• Lights
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” found within
“Multimedia” located in your Owner's Manual
for further information.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO
CONTROLS
The steering wheel audio controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for the
next listenable station.
• Push the button in the center to select the
next preset station.
Right Switch
• Push the switch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/SAT, as well as Bluetooth,
AUX, USB 1 or USB 2.
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF
EQUIPPED
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped
(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention
to the road. ALW AYS drive safely with your
hands on the steering wheel. Y ou have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and appli-
cations when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
MULTIMEDIA
216
SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership
and driving experience. When connected to an
operable network, you can:
• Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian
operator who can connect you to emergency
responders.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using the
Uconnect App from your device. You can also
do so by logging into your owner site, or by
calling SiriusXM Guardian Care when your
vehicle has an operable network connection.
Services can only be used where coverage is
available.
• Receive text or email notifications if your ve-
hicle's security alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using GPS
technology to help authorities locate your ve-
hicle if it is stolen.
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST but-
ton on your interior rearview mirror .
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are lo-
cated on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST
button is used for contacting Roadside As-
sistance, V ehicle Care, SiriusXM Guardian
Care, and Uconnect Care. The SOS Call
button connects you to a SiriusXM Guardian
Care Agent, who can connect you to emer-
gency services.
2. The Uconnect “Apps
” button is located
in the center of the menu bar of the radio
touchscreen. This is where you can manage
your Apps.
3. The Uconnect V oice Command and
Uconnect Phone buttons are located on the
left side of your steering wheel. These but-
tons let you use your voice to give com-
mands, make phone calls, send and receive
text messages, enter navigation destina-
tions, and control your radio and media
devices.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian
services starting at the date of vehicle purchase
(date based on vehicle sales notification from
your dealer). To activate the trial, you must first
register with SiriusXM Guardian. After the trial
period, if you wish to continue your SiriusXM
Guardian services you can choose to purchase a
subscription.
NOTE:
You can check UconnectPhone.com for system
and device compatibility.
SiriusXM Guardian Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guard-
ian in your vehicle, you must activate your
SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
217
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle, or
select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are
just a few examples of things you’ll be able to
do:
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a button
press away with Assist.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hun-
dreds of miles away .
• Find your vehicle, no matter where you
parked, using the convenient Vehicle Finder
function.
• Use Send & Go to send a navigation route
from your mobile phone to your vehicle’ s navi-
gation system.
For further information:.
• U.S. residents visit: www .siriusxm.com/
guardian
• Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/
guardian
Download The Uconnect App
You’re only a few steps away from using remote
commands and other valuable services.
To use the Uconnect App:
• Search for and download the Uconnect App
from the store on your compatible iPhone or
Android powered device.
• Log in to the app using the email address and
password you created when you activated the
services.
• Press the “Remote” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote
Start (if equipped), and activate your horn and
lights remotely.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to your
vehicle’s navigation system.
• Press the menu button (three horizontal lines)
in the upper left corner of the app to access
settings and support information.
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display)
Subscriptions can be purchased online by log-
ging into your owner account. If you need help
push the ASSIST button on the rearview mirror ,
then select SiriusXM Guardian Care or:
• U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091
Mobile App
MULTIMEDIA
218
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that
you remove your SiriusXM Guardian Account
information from the vehicle. Y ou can do this by
pressing the ASSIST button in your vehicle and
selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or call:
• U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091
Built-In Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. Y ou have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian ser -
vices, and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guard-
ian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. Some features are limited
while the vehicle is in motion. Some ser-
vices, including SOS, will NOT work with-
out a subscription and an operable network
connection.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could
mean you may not have SOS Call service if
needed. If the rearview mirror light is illu-
minated, have an authorized dealer service
the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction is de-
tected in any part of the airbag system. If
the Air Bag W arning Light is illuminated,
the air bag system may not be working
properly and the SOS Call system may not
send a signal to a SOS Call operator if an
air bag is deployed. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service your vehicle immediately.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from a SOS Call operator . All
occupants should exit the vehicle immedi-
ately and move to a safe location.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add af-
termarket electrical equipment to the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. This may prevent
your vehicle from sending a signal to initi-
ate an emergency call. To avoid interfer -
ence that can cause the SOS Call system to
fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle.
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the
Uconnect features, apps, and SiriusXM
Guardian services, among others, will not
operate.
219
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
1. ASSIST Call (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped —
The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST but-
ton, allowing you to speak to a call center
agent for support:
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a
flat tire, or need a tow , you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help any-
time. Additional fees may apply . Addi-
tional information in this section.
• Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for
Uconnect Apps and Features.
• SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian services.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your
FCA US LLC vehicle.
NOTE:
In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Services
to you, we may record and monitor your conver-
sations with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect
Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or V ehicle Care,
whether such conversations are initiated
through the SiriusXM Guardian services in your
vehicle, your device, or via a landline device,
and may share information obtained through
such recording and monitoring in accordance
with regulatory requirements. Y ou acknowledge,
agree, and consent to any recording, monitoring
or sharing of information obtained through any
such call recordings.
2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The
rearview mirror contains a SOS Call button
that, when pressed, may place a call from
your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian Care
operator, who can connect you to emergency
service operators, to request help from local
police, fire or ambulance personnel. If this
button is accidentally pressed, you will have
ten seconds to stop the call. To cancel, press
the SOS Call button again or press the “Can-
cel” button shown on the touchscreen. After
ten seconds has passed, the SOS call will be
placed and only the SOS Call operator can
cancel it. The LED light on the rearview
mirror will turn green once a connection to a
SOS Call operator has been made. The green
LED light will turn off once the SOS Call is
terminated. Have an authorized dealer ser-
vice the vehicle if the rearview mirror light is
continuously red. On equipped vehicles, this
feature requires a functioning electrical sys-
tem, a subscription, and an operable net-
work connection. If a connection is made
between a SOS Call operator and your ve-
hicle, you understand and agree that SOS
Call operators will stay on the line, even
after you connect with emergency services.
The Emergency services operator may, like
any other emergency call, record conversa-
tions and sounds in and near your vehicle
upon connection.
Assist And SOS
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
MULTIMEDIA
220
3. Theft Alarm Notification — If Equipped —
The Theft Alarm Notification feature notifies
you via email or text (SMS) message when
the vehicle’s factory-installed security alarm
system has been triggered. There are a num-
ber of reasons why your alarm may have been
triggered, one of which could be that your
vehicle was stolen. If so, please see the
details of the Stolen V ehicle Assistance ser -
vice below . When activated, Theft Alarm No-
tification is automatically set to send you an
email at the email address you provide
should the alarm go off. Y ou may also opt to
have a text message sent to your device.
4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle
is stolen, contact local law enforcement im-
mediately to file a stolen vehicle report.
Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM
Guardian Care can help locate your vehicle.
The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent will ask
for the stolen vehicle report number issued
by local law enforcement. As long as your
vehicle has a SiriusXM Guardian subscrip-
tion and an operable network connection,
the agent may be able to locate the stolen
vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it. Y our vehicle must have an
operable network connection and must be
registered with SiriusXM Guardian with an
active subscription that includes the appli-
cable feature.
5. 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows
you and your passengers to connect their
portable devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi
capabilities of your Uconnect system. Pur-
chasing 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot requires the use of
an Internet-enabled portable device.
NOTE:
Uconnect offers a complimentary 3–month
trial period that includes 1GB of total data.
The trial can be activated any time within
the first year of new vehicle ownership.
a. To start, the Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot box
should be un-checked.
b. Select the Wi-Fi Hotspot Setup option
from the toushcreeen to locate your
Hotspot Name and Password. Make note
of this information.
c. Tap the Back Arrow to return to the main
Wi-Fi Hotspot page, then check the box
to Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot.
d. From your portable device Wi-Fi settings
menu, select the Hotspot Name from the
list of available networks and enter the
provided Password.
e. Open the web browser on your portable
device and enter the following web ad-
dress: https://myvehicle.att.com/#/login.
f. Create a myVehicle account or log in to
your existing one.
g. Select and purchase the desired sub-
scription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot will
activate after a few minutes.
For additional assistance, call AT&T Cus-
tomer Care at: 866-595-1330.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM Guard-
ian services to operate.
221
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android
powered device, the Uconnect App allows you
to remotely lock or unlock your doors, start your
engine or activate your horn and lights from
virtually anywhere. Y our vehicle must be
equipped with remote start, must have a
SiriusXM Guardian subscription, and must have
an operable network connection. Services can
only be used where coverage is available. Y ou
can download the App from Mopar Owner Con-
nect or from the App Store (iPhone) or Google
Play Store (Android). Visit UconnectPhone.com
to determine if your device is compatible. For
Uconnect Phone customer support and to de-
termine if your device is compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400.
Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com
or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
call:1-800-387-9983 (French).
Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature pro-
vides the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any
distance. Y ou can send a request to your vehicle
in one of two ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not entered
your vehicle with the key, the engine will
shut off automatically.
• You can also send a command to turn-off
an engine that has been remote started.
• This remote function requires your ve-
hicle to be equipped with a factory-
installed Remote Start system. To utilize
this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login with your user name
and password.
You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian
Security PIN to confirm the request. Press the
“remote start” icon on your Uconnect App to
remotely start the vehicle.
You can set-up notifications for your account to
receive an email or text (SMS) message every
time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner
Connect at mopar .com and click on Edit Profile
to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — If Equipped —
This feature provides the ability to lock or un-
lock the door on your vehicle, without the keys
and from virtually any distance. Y ou can send a
request to your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting SiriusXM Guardian Care on
the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM
Guardian Security PIN to confirm the request.
Press the “closed lock” icon on your Uconnect
App to lock the doors, and press the “open lock”
icon to unlock the driver’s door .
MULTIMEDIA
222
You can set-up notifications for your account to
receive an email or text (SMS) message every
time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner
Connect at mopar .com and click on Edit Profile
to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Remote Horn And Lights — If Equipped — It’ s
easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or
noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason. Y ou can
send a request to your vehicle in one of three
ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care
on the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM
Guardian Security PIN to confirm the request.
You can set-up notifications for your account to
receive an email or text (SMS) message every
time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner
Connect at mopar .com and click on Edit Profile
to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Vehicle Finder
The V ehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect
Mobile App allows you to find the location of
your vehicle when you can't remember where it's
parked. Y ou can also sound the alarm and flash
the lights to make finding your vehicle even
easier.
To find your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Select the “V ehicle” icon to determine the
location of your vehicle.
3. Select the “Find Route” button that ap-
pears, once your vehicle is located.
4. Select your preferred Navigation App to
route a path to your vehicle.
Send & Go
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect Mobile
App allows you to search for a destination on
your mobile device and then send the route to
your vehicle’ s Uconnect Navigation system.
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Either type in the destination you would like
to navigate to, or search through one of the
categories provided.
3. Select the destination you want to route to
from the list that appears.
4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and
then confirm the destination by pressing
“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the
Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.
5. Finally, confirm the route inside your vehicle
by pressing the “Go Now” option on the
pop-up that appears on the touchscreen,
when the vehicle is started.
223
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
There are many ways to play music from
MP3 players or USB devices through your vehi-
cle's sound system. Press your Media button on
the touchscreen to begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device to be plugged into
the radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound sys-
tem, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify
the source and play through the vehicle
speakers.
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touch-
screen will change the mode to auxiliary de-
vice if the audio jack is connected, allowing
the music from your device to be heard
through the vehicle's speakers. To activate the
AUX, plug in the audio jack.
• The functions of the device are controlled
using the device buttons. The volume may be
controlled using the radio or device.
• To route the audio cable out of the center
console, use the access cut out in the front of
the console.
USB Port
• Connect your compatible device using a USB
cable into the USB Port. USB Memory sticks
with audio files can also be used. Audio from
the device can be played on the vehicles
sound system while providing metadata (art-
ist, track title, album, etc.) information on the
radio display.
• When connected, the compatible USB device
can be controlled using the radio or Steering
Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip to the next
or previous track, browse, and list the con-
tents.
• The battery charges when plugged into the
USB port (if supported by the specific device).
• To route the USB cable out of the center
console, use the access cut out.
NOTE:
When connecting your device for the first time,
the system may take several minutes to read
your music, depending on the number of files.
For example, the system will take approximately
five minutes for every 1,000 songs loaded on
the device. Also during the reading process, the
Shuffle and Browse functions will be disabled.
This process is needed to ensure the full use of
your features and only happens the first time it
is connected. After the first time, the reading
process of your device will take considerably
less time unless changes are made or new songs
are added to the playlist.
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — USB Port One
2 — Audio/AUX Jack
3 — USB Port Two
MULTIMEDIA
224
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
• If equipped with Uconnect V oice Command,
your Bluetooth-equipped device may also be
able to stream music to your vehicle's sound
system. Y our connected device must be
Bluetooth-compatible and paired with your
system (see Uconnect Phone for pairing in-
structions). Y ou can access the music from
your connected Bluetooth device by pressing
the Bluetooth
button on the touchscreen
while in Media mode.
225
Media Controls
Uconnect 4 Media Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Music Track And Time
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks
4 — Music Track Information
5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue To Be Played
6 — Browse Music By
7 — Music Source
MULTIMEDIA
226
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Music Track And Time
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks
4 — Music Track Information
5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue To Be Played
6 — Browse Music By
7 — Music Source
227
The controls are accessed by pressing the de-
sired button on the touchscreen and choosing
between AUX, USB, or Bluetooth.
NOTE:
Uconnect will automatically switch to the ap-
propriate mode when something is first con-
nected or inserted into the system.
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
• The information in the section below is only
applicable if you have the Uconnect 4C NAV
With 8.4–inch Display system.
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in
the menu bar to access the Navigation system.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen in the lower right area of the screen.
2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance”
button on the touchscreen.
3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav V ol-
ume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons on
the touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA
228
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation
1 — Search For A Destination In All Categories
2 — Find A Destination
3 — View Map
4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destination
5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destination
6 — Navigation Settings
7 — Emergency
8 — Information
229
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then
press the “Points of Interest” button on the
touchscreen.
• Select a category and then a subcategory , if
necessary.
• Select your destination and press the “GO!”
button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the
“Where to?” button on the touchscreen, press
the “Points of Interest” button on the touch-
screen, then press the “Spell Name” or
“Search All” button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” or “OK” button on the touch-
screen.
• Select your destination and press the “GO!”
button on the touchscreen.
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
• Enter a navigation destination without taking
your hands off the wheel.
• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command
button on the steering wheel, wait for
the beep and say something like, "Find Ad-
dress 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI."
NOTE:
Using your touchscreens keyboard is not avail-
able while your vehicle is in motion. However ,
you can also use V oice Commands to enter an
address while moving. Refer to “Uconnect
V oice Recognition Quick Tips” in this section for
further information.
Setting Your Home Location
• To add a Home location, press the “Nav”
button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to
access the Navigation system and the Main
Navigation menu.
• Press the “Home” button on the touchscreen.
You can add a Home location by either select-
ing “Spell City,” “Spell Street,” or “Select
Country.” Select County is automatically filled
out based on your state.
• Once you have entered your Home location,
select the “Save Home” button located on the
lower left-hand side of your touchscreen.
• To delete a saved Home location (or other
saved locations), so you can save a new Home
location, press the “Nav” button on the touch-
screen, and in the “Where To” screen, press
“Edit Where To” and then press the “Home”
button on the touchscreen. Under the Manage
screen press the “Reset Location” button. A
confirmation screen will appear asking if you
“Are you sure you want to reset this location?”
Press “Reset” to confirm the deletion. Set a
new Home location by following the previous
instructions.
MULTIMEDIA
230
Home
• A Home location must be saved in the system.
From the Main Navigation menu, press the
“Home” button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Map
1 — Distance To Next Turn
2 — Next Turn Street
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival
4 — Zoom In And Out
5 — Y our Location On The Map
6 — Navigation Main Menu
7 — Current Street Location
8 — Navigation Routing Options
231
Your route is marked with a blue line on the
map. If you depart from the original route, your
route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could
appear as you travel on major roadways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a route.
•
Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen
to return to the Main Navigation menu.
•
Press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then search for the extra stop. When
another location has been selected, you can
choose to cancel your previous route, add as the
first destination or add as the last destination.
•
Press the desired selection and press the
“GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a
route.
•
Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only
reasonable option, the device may not calculate
a detour . For more information, see your
Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display)
Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By en-
hancing your vehicle's navigation system with
the ability to see detailed traffic information,
you can pinpoint traffic incidents, determine
average traffic speed and estimate travel time
along your route. Since the service is integrated
with a vehicle's navigation system, SiriusXM
Traffic Plus can help drivers pick the fastest
route based on traffic conditions.
• Detailed information on traffic speed, acci-
dents, construction, and road closings.
• Traffic information from multiple sources, in-
cluding police and emergency services, cam-
eras and road sensors.
• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information.
• View conditions for points along your route
and beyond. Available in over 130 markets.
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display)
In addition to delivering over 130 channels of
the best sports, entertainment, talk, and
commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers pre-
mium data services that work in conjunction
with compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM
Travel Link brings a wealth of useful information
into your vehicle and right to your fingertips.
• Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel
prices in your area and route to the station of
your choice.
• Movie Listings — Check local movie theatres
and listings in your area and route to the
theater of your choice.
• Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as
well as weekly schedules.
• Weather — Check variety of local and national
weather information from radar maps to cur-
rent and 5-day forecast.
MULTIMEDIA
232
SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely inte-
grated into your vehicle. A few minutes after you
start your vehicle, Travel Link information ar-
rives and updates in the background. You can
access the information whenever you like, with
no waiting.
To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps”
button on the touchscreen, then press the
“SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touch-
screen.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription,
sold separately after the trial subscription in-
cluded with your vehicle purchase.
233
UCONNECT PHONE
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio Phone Menu
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply with Text Message
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones
(requires Bluetooth MAP profile)
MULTIMEDIA
234
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone Menu
1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Do Not Disturb
4 — Reply with Text Message
5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name
6 — Conference Call*
7 — Phone Pairing
8 — Text Messaging Menu**
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Contact Menu
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Favorite Contacts
13 — Mute Microphone
14 — Decline Incoming Call
15 — Answer/Redial/Hold
16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones
(requires Bluetooth MAP profile)
235
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to
place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone calls
using their voice or by using the buttons on the
touchscreen (see Voice Command section).
The hands-free calling feature is made possible
through Bluetooth technology — the global
standard that enables different electronic de-
vices to connect to each other wirelessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button
exists on
your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Pro-
file, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible
with the Uconnect system, however some mo-
bile phones/devices may not be equipped with
all of the required features to utilize all of the
Uconnect system features.
For Uconnect Customer Care:
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400.
• Canadian residents visit UconnectPhone.com
or call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French).
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
Mobile phone pairing is the process of estab-
lishing a wireless connection between a cellular
phone and the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
•
To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first
must determine if your mobile phone and soft-
ware are compatible with the Uconnect system.
Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while
the vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of ten mobile phones can be
paired to the Uconnect system.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Uconnect 4:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.
2. Press the “Phone” button.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
•
Uconnect Phone will display an “In prog-
ress” screen while the system is connecting.
Uconnect 4
MULTIMEDIA
236
Uconnect 4C, 4C NAV:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar
on the touchscreen.
3. Select “Pairing.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
•
Uconnect Phone will display an “In prog-
ress” screen while the system is connecting.
Pair Your iPhone:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will be-
gin to search for Bluetooth connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect”.
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:
1. When prompted on the mobile phone, ac-
cept the connection request from Uconnect
Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
Uconnect 4C & 4C NAV
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
Pairing Request
237
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully com-
pleted, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite mobile
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this mobile
phone the highest priority. This mobile phone
will take precedence over other paired mobile
phones within range and will connect to the
Uconnect system automatically when entering
the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Pair Your Android Device:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will be-
gin to search for Bluetooth connections.
5. Once your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect”.
• You may be prompted by your mobile
phone to download the phonebook,
check “Do Not Ask Again” to automati-
cally download the phonebook. This is so
you can make calls by saying the name of
your contact.
Uconnect Device
MULTIMEDIA
238
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:
1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile
phone matches the passkey shown on the
Uconnect system then accept the Bluetooth
pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to be
entered manually , enter the PIN number
shown on the Uconnect screen.
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority
Level
When the pairing process has successfully com-
pleted, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone.
Selecting “Y es” will make this mobile phone the
highest priority. This mobile phone will take prece-
dence over other paired mobile phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device
can be connected to the Uconnect system at a
time. If “No” is selected, simply select
“Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device
Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth device.
NOTE:
Software updates, either on your phone or
Uconnect system, may interfere with the
Bluetooth connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth settings.
You are now ready to make hands-free calls.
Press the Uconnect “Phone” button
on
your steering wheel to begin.
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for addi-
tional information on mobile phone pairing and
for a list of compatible phones.
Common Phone Commands (Examples)
• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on the
Phone main screen to mute and unmute the
call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle
• During an on-going call, press the “Transfer”
button on the Phone main screen to transfer
an on-going call between handset and vehicle.
Pairing Request
239
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync
your phonebook from your paired phone, if this
feature is supported by your phone. Phonebook
contacts are updated each time that the phone
is connected. If your phone book entries do not
appear, check the settings on your phone. Some
phones require you to enable this feature manu-
ally.
• Y our phonebook can be browsed on the
Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing
can only be done on your phone. To browse,
press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen,
then the “Phonebook” button on the
touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as
Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are
shown at the top of the main phone screen.
Voice Command Tips
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John Doe
vs. Call John) will result in greater system
accuracy.
• Y ou can “link” commands together for faster
results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,” for ex-
ample.
• If you are listening to available voice com-
mand options, you do not have to listen to the
entire list. When you hear the command that
you need, push the
button on the
steering wheel, wait for the beep and say your
command.
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button
, then say a command. For example,
"Help".
• Use the radio VOLUME rotary knob to adjust
the volume to a comfortable level while the
Uconnect system is speaking.
NOTE:
The volume setting for Uconnect is different
than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the Uconnect VR button
(if active) on the steering wheel and say
"help." Push the Uconnect VR Pickup button
(if active) or the VR button (if active)
and say "cancel" to cancel the help session.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-
tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now , I will get back to you
shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA
240
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
Incoming Text Messages
After pairing your Uconnect system with a
Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the Message
Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect system can
announce a new incoming text message and read it
to you over the vehicle’s audio system.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.
To enable incoming text messaging:
iPhone
1. Press the settings button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the
mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect
system.
3. Select
located under DEVICES next to
Uconnect.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile phone.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
•
A pop up will appear asking you to accept
a request for permission to connect to
your messages. Select “Don’t ask again”
and press OK.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during the
current ignition cycle will be deleted from the
Uconnect system when the ignition is turned to
the OFF position.
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
Enable Android Device Incoming Text
Messages
241
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To
Improve Bluetooth Performance With Your
Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after
pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or trusted
device in mobile phone Bluetooth settings
(Blackberry devices).
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile phone.
Refer to your mobile phone manufacturer or
cellular provider for instructions.
• Many mobile phones do not automatically
reconnect after being restarted (hard reboot).
Your mobile phone can still be connected
manually. Close all applications that may be
operating (refer to mobile phone manufactur -
er’s instructions), and follow “Pairing (Wire-
lessly Connecting) Y our Mobile Phone To The
Uconnect System”.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by
removing the battery (if removable — see your
mobile phone’ s owner manual).
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and
Uconnect system; usually found in phone’ s
Bluetooth connection settings.
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the
discovered Bluetooth devices on your mobile
phone.
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code
the default is 0000.
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“phonebook download” request on your mo-
bile phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four num-
bers per contact will transfer to the Uconnect
4C/4C NA V system phonebook.
• Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers
per contact will transfer to the Uconnect 4
system phonebook.
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carri-
ers do not support conference calling. Refer to
your mobile phone user’ s manual for further
information.
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while
connected to Bluetooth will disable Hands-
Free Calling. Do not make calls while your
mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
V oice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect system.
Uconnect 4
MULTIMEDIA
242
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
Helpful hints for using V oice Recognition:
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and pas-
senger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The microphone
is positioned on the rearview mirror and
aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the V oice Recognition
(VR) or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your V oice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or sys-
tem prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from
current category.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A
Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio,
Media, or Climate Functions. For 8.4–
inch System Only: Push To Begin Naviga-
tion Function
3 — Push To End Call
243
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
•“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
•“Help” to hear a list of suggested V oice Com-
mands
•“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’ s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Sat-
ellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
•“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
•“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a V oice Command, push the
VR button
and say, “Help.” The system
provides you with a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
V oice operation is only available for connected
USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands and follow the
prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist.
•“Change source to Bluetooth”
•“Change source to AUX”
•“Change source to USB”
•“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Great-
est Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”;
“Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touch-
screen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match ex-
actly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 4 Radio
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
MULTIMEDIA
244
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook but-
ton is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing instruc-
tions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
•“Call John Smith”
•“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
•“Redial (call previous outgoing phone num-
ber)”
•“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP: When providing a V oice Command, push
the Phone button
and say “Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in
your phone book. When a contact has multiple
phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith
work.”
Uconnect 4 Media
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
Uconnect 4 Phone
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
245
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the Phone button
and say “Listen.”
(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined mes-
sages and follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traf-
fic.
See you later .
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need direc-
tions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Y our mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For
details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. To enable this
feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these four
simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri
Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text
message.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures
hands-free and keep everyone comfortable
while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is
equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust
the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired V ehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
MULTIMEDIA
246
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when you
know exactly how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee
shop.”
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including
SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call will
NOT work without an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to
take advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services
in the next section of this guide. To register with
SiriusXM Guardian, press the Apps button on the
Uconnect 4C/4C NA V touchscreen to get started.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian is available only on
equipped vehicles purchased within the conti-
nental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and
Canada. Services can only be used where cov-
erage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Uconnect 4 Climate
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Navigation
247
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
V ehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
V ehicle Health Reports**
V ehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guard-
ian in your vehicle, you must activate your
SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle, or
select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
• U.S. residents visit: www .siriusxm.com/
guardian.
• Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/
guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email
report, which summarizes the performance of
your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’ s maintenance needs if you
are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Y our ve-
hicle will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts
when it detects issues with its key systems that
need your attention. For further information,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’ s Manual Supple-
ment.
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote
commands and sending a destination from your
phone to your vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your SiriusXM
Guardian services, download the Uconnect
App to your mobile device. Use your Owner
Account login and password to open the app.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin
using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Ve-
hicle Start, and activate your horn and lights
remotely, if equipped.
Mobile App
MULTIMEDIA
248
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to your
Uconnect Navigation using V ehicle Finder
and Send & Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper
left corner of the app to bring up app settings.
NOTE:
For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie
listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day
weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite
of services that brings a wealth of information
right to your Uconnect 4C NA V system. (Not
available for Uconnect 4 system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•“Show fuel prices”
•“Show 5 - day weather forecast”
•“Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice
Command.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text mes-
sages, select media, place phone calls and
much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is de-
signed to keep your eyes on the road and your
hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect V oice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages and many other
useful requests.
SiriusXM Travel Link
Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available
249
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-
tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now , I will get back to you
shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’ s best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’ s voice recogni-
tion system, and use your smartphone’ s data
plan to project your Android powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android
5.0 (Lollipop), or higher , to one of the media
USB ports, using the factory-provided USB
cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that
replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu
bar to begin Android Auto. Push and hold the
VR button on the steering wheel, or press and
hold the “Microphone” icon within Android
Auto, to activate Android’ s VR, which recog-
nizes natural voice commands, to use a list of
your smartphone’ s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri
Eyes Free Available
MULTIMEDIA
250
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto, and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer . Some Apple Car -
Play features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’ s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’ s
data plan to project your iPhone and a number
of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen.
Connect your iPhone 5, or higher , to one of the
media USB ports, using the factory-provided
Lightning cable, and press the new CarPlay icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main
menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay. Press and
hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or
press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natu-
ral voice commands to use a list of your iPhone’s
features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Android Auto On 7-inch Display
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display
251
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’ s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. V e-
hicle user interface is a product of Apple
®
.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of
use and privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or
call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit www.siriusxm.com/
guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit www .siriusxm.ca/
guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
MULTIMEDIA
252
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE............254
FCA US LLC Customer Center........254
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .....254
In Mexico Contact ..............254
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . .254
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).........255
Service Contract ...............255
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS..........256
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. ......................256
In Canada ...................256
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........256
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
253
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are
vitally interested in your satisfaction. W e want
you to be happy with our products and services.
W arranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. W e strongly recommend that you take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer . They know
your vehicle the best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner .
This is why you should always talk to an autho-
rized dealer service manager first. Most matters
can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer . They want to know if you
need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer's
customer center .
Any communication to the manufacturer's cus-
tomer center should include the following infor-
mation:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-
9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
254
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficul-
ties, the manufacturer has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center . Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access to
a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in
the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New V ehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
manufacturer stands behind only the manufac-
turer's service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer's service contract, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification
Card in the mail within three weeks of the
vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions
about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er's Service Contract National Customer Hotline
at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-
9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufacturer's
service contract. It is not responsible for any
service contract other than the manufacturer's
service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer's service
contract, and you require service after the
manufacturer's New V ehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
W e appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major invest-
ment in facilities, tools, and training to assure
that you are absolutely delighted with the own-
ership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or
related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion en-
gines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other re-
productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other reproduc-
tive harm.
255
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and rem-
edy campaign. However , NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems
between you, an authorized dealer or
FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the V ehicle Safety Hotline toll
free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Av-
enue, SE., W est Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. Y ou can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www .safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investiga-
tions and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510
or go to http://www .tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
• Y ou can purchase a copy of the Owner's
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or
W arranty Booklet. United States customers
may visit the Dodge Contact Us page at
www.dodge.com scroll to the bottom of the
page and select the “Contact Us” link, then
select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove Com-
partment Material” from the left menu. Y ou
can also purchase a copy by calling
1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits or , if you prefer ,
additional printed copies of the Owner's
Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio Manuals
may be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com or by calling
1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master
Card, American Express and Discover orders
are accepted.
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide elec-
tronic files are also available on the Chrysler ,
Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/
Service Manuals”. Then select your desired
model year and vehicle from the drop down
lists.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
256
Accessories ..................194
Mopar ...................194
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control)...................120
Off..................120, 122
On ..................120, 122
Adding Fuel ..................127
Additives, Fuel ................128
AirBag .....................84
Advance Front Air Bag ...........84
Air Bag Operation .............86
Air Bag Warning Light ...........83
Driver Knee Air Bag ............86
Enhanced Accident Response . . .91, 156
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......157
Front Air Bag ................84
If Deployment Occurs ...........90
Knee Impact Bolsters ...........86
Maintaining Y our Air Bag System ....91
Maintenance ................91
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ....84
Side Air Bags ................87
Transporting Pets .............103
Air Bag Light ............56, 83, 104
Air Conditioning ................34
Air Conditioning Filter .............42
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......42
Air Pressure
Tires ....................178
Alarm
Arm The System ..............16
Security Alarm .............16, 59
Alarm System
Security Alarm ...............16
All Wheel Drive
Towing ...................156
Android Auto ...........203, 209, 250
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ......189, 190
Anti-Lock Warning Light ............62
Apple CarPlay ..........205, 213, 251
Arming System
Security Alarm ...............16
Audio Jack...................224
Automatic Headlights .............31
Automatic High Beams ............30
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). .34, 41
Automatic Transmission ...........112
Adding Fluid ......191, 192, 193, 194
Fluid
Type .......191, 192, 193, 194
Autostick
Operation .................114
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . .49
AWD
Towing ...................156
Axle Fluid .........191, 192, 193, 194
Axle Lubrication......191, 192, 193, 194
Back-Up ....................126
Battery ..................57, 150
Charging System Light ..........57
Jump Starting ...............150
Location ..................150
Belts, Seat...................104
Blind Spot Monitoring .............68
B-Pillar Location ...............175
Brake Fluid ........191, 192, 193, 194
Brake System
Fluid Check ......191, 192, 193, 194
W arning Light ................56
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle
. .109
Bulb Replacement ..............132
Bulbs, Light ..............106, 132
INDEX
257
Camera, Rear .................126
Capacities, Fluid ............189, 190
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ................167
Carbon Monoxide Warning..........104
Changing A Flat Tire .............171
Chart, Tire Sizing ...............172
Checking Y our Vehicle For Safety ......103
Checks, Safety ................103
Child Restraint .................92
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ................95
Child Seat Installation ..........101
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt
. .99
Infant And Child Restraints ........94
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children
. .96
Older Children And Child Restraints . . .94
Seating Positions ..............95
Cleaning
Wheels ...................184
Climate Control .................34
Automatic ..................34
Compact Spare Tire .............183
Contract, Service ...............255
Cooling System
Cooling Capacity ..........189, 190
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ......189, 190, 191, 193
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .......117
Cruise Light ................63, 64
Customer Assistance .............254
Customer Programmable Features .....215
Cybersecurity .................199
Deck Lid
Power Release ...............45
Defroster, Windshield ............105
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........65
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ..................30
Disable Vehicle Towing............155
Disturb .................240, 250
Door Ajar ....................57
Door Ajar Light .................57
Doors ......................18
Drag And Drop Menu .........201, 207
Drive Modes ..............116, 215
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .............21
E-85 Fuel ...................189
Electronic Power Distribution Center
(Fuses) ...................134
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .118
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . .58
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ......154
Jacking ...............140, 171
Jump Starting ...........150, 151
Towing ...................155
Engine ...........167, 168, 169, 170
Break-In Recommendations . . .109, 110
Compartment ........167, 168, 170
Compartment Identification . . .167, 169
Coolant (Antifreeze) ........191, 193
Exhaust Gas Caution ...........104
Fuel
Requirements ........189, 190
Jump Starting ...........150, 151
Oil ...........189, 190, 191, 193
Oil Filler Cap ...............167
Oil Selection ............189, 190
Overheating ................152
Starting ..................108
Enhanced Accident Response Feature.91, 156
Ethanol ....................189
Exhaust Gas Cautions ............104
Exhaust System................104
Exterior Lighting ................30
Exterior Lights ..............30, 106
INDEX
258
Filters
Air Conditioning ..............42
Engine Oil ..............191, 193
Flashers
Turn Signals ...........32, 63, 106
Flash-To-Pass ..................31
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel Requirements ............189
Fluid, Brake ........191, 192, 193, 194
Fluid Capacities ............189, 190
Fluid Leaks ..................106
Fluids And Lubricants .........191, 193
Fog Lights ....................31
Fold-Flat Seats .................21
Folding Rear Seats ...............25
Forward Collision Warning...........69
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...........154
Fuel
Additives ..................128
Ethanol ..................189
Flexible ..................189
Materials Added .............128
Octane Rating ...........191, 193
Requirements ...........189, 190
Specifications ...........191, 193
Tank Capacity ............189, 190
Fuses......................133
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .......45
Hands-Free Phone
Uconnect .................234
Headlights
Automatic ..................31
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . .30
On With Wipers ...............32
Passing ...................31
Switch ....................30
Head Restraints ..............26, 27
Head Rests.................26, 27
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ....................30
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .......45
Hood Prop....................44
Hood Release ..................44
Ignition .....................14
Switch ....................14
Information Center , Vehicle ..........
54
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .................63
Introduction ...................1
Jack Location .................140
Jack Operation ................171
Jump Starting .............150, 151
Key Fob
Arm The System ..............16
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..............18
Passive Entry ................18
Passive Entry Programming ........18
Keys .......................12
Replacement ................13
Lane Change And Turn Signals ........32
Lane Change Assist ..............32
LaneSense...................125
Lap/Shoulder Belts ...............77
Latches ....................106
Hood .....................44
Leaks, Fluid ..................106
Life Of Tires ..................181
Light Bulbs ...............106, 132
Lights .....................106
AirBag..............56, 83, 104
Automatic Headlights ...........31
Brake Warning ...............56
Bulb Replacement ............132
Cruise ..................63, 64
259
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........30
Engine Temperature Warning .......58
Exterior ..................106
Fog......................31
Headlights .................30
Headlights On With Wipers ........32
Headlight Switch ..............30
High Beam .................30
High Beam/Low Beam Select .......30
Instrument Cluster .............30
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . .59
Park ...................31, 63
Passing ...................31
Seat Belt Reminder ............59
Security Alarm ...............59
Service ...................132
Turn Signals ...........32, 63, 106
W arning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ..............58, 63
Loading Vehicle
Tires ....................175
Low Tire Pressure System ...........70
Lug Nuts....................188
Maintenance Schedule. .160, 161, 163, 164
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) ...............59
Manual, Service................256
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .......21
Memory Seat ..................21
Memory Seats And Radio ...........21
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ........70
Mopar Accessories ..............194
Navigation ...................228
New Vehicle Break-In Period ........109
Occupant Restraints ..............75
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . .191, 193
Oil Change Indicator ..............55
Reset ....................55
Oil, Engine ...............191, 193
Capacity ...............189, 190
Filter .................191, 193
Pressure Warning Light ..........58
Recommendation .........189, 190
Viscosity ...............189, 190
Oil Pressure Light ...............58
Onboard Diagnostic System..........65
Operating Precautions .............65
Overheating, Engine .............152
Owner's
Manual (Operator Manual).....256
Paddle Shifters ................114
Paddle Shift Mode ..............114
ParkSense System, Rear...........124
Passing Light ..................31
Passive Entry ..................18
Personalized Main Menu .......201, 207
Pets ......................103
Phone
Pairing ...................236
Phonebook ..................240
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) .......234
Phone (Uconnect) ..............234
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . .175
Power
Deck Lid Release ..............45
Distribution Center (Fuses) .......136
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ....49
Sunroof ...................43
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .....29
Power Steering Fluid ......191, 193, 194
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.......81
Preparation For Jacking ...........141
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..................81
Radial Ply Tires ................179
Radio
Presets ...............202, 208
INDEX
260
Radio Frequency
General Information .......14, 16, 20
Radio Operation ............200, 206
Radio Screens .............200, 206
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .........33
Rear Camera .................126
Rear Cross Path ................68
Rear ParkSense System ...........124
Rear Seats, Folding ..............25
Rear Wheel Drive
Towing ...................156
Recreational Towing .............129
Release, Hood .................44
Reminder, Seat Belt ..............76
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm ...............16
Remote Trunk Release .............45
Replacement Bulbs .............132
Replacement Keys ...............13
Replacement Tires ..............181
Reporting Safety Defects ..........256
Restraints, Child ................92
Restraints, Head..............26, 27
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ........154
RWD
Towing ...................156
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........104
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .......106
Safety Defects, Reporting ..........256
Safety, Exhaust Gas .............104
Safety Information, Tire ...........171
Safety Tips...................103
Schedule, Maintenance.....160, 161, 163
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ..................80
Seat Belt Reminder ..............59
Seat Belts.................76, 104
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .........80
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .80
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . .82
Child Restraints ..............92
Energy Management Feature .......81
Extender ...................80
Front Seat .............76, 77, 78
Inspection .................104
Lap/Shoulder
Belt Operation .......78
Lap/Shoulder Belts .............77
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .......79
Operating Instructions ...........78
Pregnant Women ..............81
Pretensioners ................81
Rear Seat ..................77
Reminder ..................76
Seat Belt Extender .............80
Seat Belt Pretensioner ...........81
Untwisting Procedure ...........79
Seats ....................21, 24
Adjustment .................21
Easy Entry ..................23
Head Restraints ............26, 27
Heated ....................24
Memory ...................21
Rear Folding ..............21, 25
Seatback Release .............25
Tilting ....................21
V ented ....................25
V entilated ..................25
Security Alarm ...............16, 59
Arm The System ..............16
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze). . .191, 193
Sentry Key Replacement ...........13
Service Assistance ..............254
Service Contract ...............255
Service Manuals ...............256
Shifting ....................111
Automatic Transmission ......111, 112
Shoulder Belts .................77
Signals, Turn ............32, 63, 106
Siri .......................249
261
Sirius Satellite Radio
Traffic & Weather .............232
Sirius Travel Link ...............232
SiriusXM Guardian ..............216
Account ..................216
App.....................218
In Vehicle Features ............219
Maintaining Y our Account ........219
Registration ................217
Remote Features .............222
Renewing Subscriptions .........218
Send&Go.................223
V ehicle Finder ...............223
V ehicle Health Alert ...........248
Snow Tires ...................182
Spare Tires ............140, 183, 184
Spark Plugs ...............191, 193
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ...........191, 193
Oil ..................191, 193
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .............118, 119
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .........121
Cancel ...................119
Distance Setting (ACC Only) ......122
Mode Setting (ACC Only) ........123
Resume ..................119
Set .....................118
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . .117, 118
Sport Mode ..................117
Starting ....................108
Button ....................14
Starting And Operating............108
Starting Procedures .............108
Steering .....................28
Column Lock ................28
Tilt Column ...............28, 29
Wheel, Heated ...............29
Wheel, Tilt ...............28, 29
Steering
Wheel Audio Controls .......216
Storage, Vehicle ................42
Stuck, Freeing ................154
Sun Roof ....................43
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag
. . .84
Telescoping Steering Column ......28, 29
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)....41
Text Messages.................241
Tilt Steering Column ...........28, 29
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . .175
Tire Markings .................171
Tires ............106, 178, 183, 185
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...........181
Air Pressure ................178
Changing ...........140, 144, 171
Compact Spare ..............183
Flat Changing ...............144
General Information ........178, 183
High Speed ................179
Inflation Pressure .............178
Jacking ...............141, 171
Life Of Tires ................181
Load Capacity ...............175
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
.60, 70
Quality Grading ..............185
Radial ...................179
Replacement ............144, 181
Safety ................171, 178
Sizes ....................172
Snow Tires .................182
Spare Tires ..........140, 183, 184
Spinning ..................180
Tread Wear Indicators ..........180
Wheel Mounting .............144
Wheel Nut Torque ............188
Tire Safety Information............171
Tire Service Kit ......144, 145, 146, 149
To Open Hood .................44
Towing .....................129
Behind A Motorhome ..........129
Disabled Vehicle .............155
INDEX
262
Guide ...................129
Recreational ................129
W eight ...................129
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........129
Trailer Towing .................129
Trailer Towing Guide .............129
Trailer Weight .................129
Transfer Case
Fluid .............191, 192, 193
Transmission .................112
Automatic .................112
Fluid ..........191, 192, 193, 194
Shifting ..................111
Transporting Pets ...............103
Tread Wear Indicators ............180
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ..............45
Trunk Release Remote Control ........45
Turn Signals ................32, 63
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch
Display ...................206
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display ......200
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call ...........234
Receiving A Call .............234
Uconnect Phone ...............234
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ....18
Passive Entry Programming ........18
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .........185
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .......79
USB......................224
V ehicle Loading ................175
V ehicle Security Alarm.............16
V ehicle Storage .................42
V ehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ...............11
IVH......................11
Navigation ..................11
Operating Instructions ...........11
Searching User Guide ...........11
V oice Command ............240, 242
Commands ................239
V
oice Recognition System
(VR) ..............239, 240, 242
W arning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) ................60
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........184
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim .........184
Window Fogging ................42
Windshield Defroster .............105
Windshield Washers ..............32
Windshield Wipers ...............32
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .............33
263
264
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Dodge
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference for common questions. However, it
is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions,
maintenance procedures and important
safety messages, please consult your
Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the
back cover and other Warning Labels in
your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may
apply to your vehicle. For additional
information on accessories to help
personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Dodge brand dealer.
DRIVING AND
ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most
frequent causes of collisions. Your
driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a
collision. Your perceptions are less
sharp, your reflexes are slower and
your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and
then drive.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the
safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, resulting in a collision and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme
caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as
cellular telephones, computers, portable
radios, vehicle navigation or other devices,
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous and could lead to a serious
collision. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while
the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle. Some
states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road
highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in
a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
IMPORTANT
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable
year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer
2018
CHARGER
USER
GUIDE
Whether it’s providing information about specific
product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment,
we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your
Dodge brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your
make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers
tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this
information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review
and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area
of the mopar.com (U.S.) or owners.mopar.ca (Canada)
homepage and follow the instructions to select the
applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY
OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S
MANUAL, MEDIA AND WARRANTY
BOOKLET BY VISITING:
WWW.MOPAR.COM/EN-US/CARE/OWNERS-MANUAL.HTML
(U.S. RESIDENTS);
WWW.OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
(CANADIAN RESIDENTS).
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
©2018 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC.
18LD-926-AA
CHARGER
SIXTH EDITION
USER GUIDE
